Home

HP 5334B User's Manual

1. e E 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD ij i Pd 4 i 3 i 14 OIO Gy Gj O 3i ge Goo NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 if Start and Stop signals are from separate sources connect Start signal to INPUT A jack Stop signal to INPUT B jack and press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF If Start and Stop signals are from a common source connect signal to INPUT A jack and press COM A key to COMMON position LED ON 3 Press T l A B function key and press AUTO TRIG off 4 Press AC DC 500 Z 1M0 SLOPE and X10 ATTN keys to appropriate positions NOTE When the COM A key isin COMMON LED ON only the A CHANNEL AC DC and 50 Z 1M keys are effective However X10 X1 ATTN SLOPE and TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls operate independently S Press SENS key to TRIGGER LEVEL position LED OFF This sets the sensitivity to maximum and allows variable selection of trigger levels 6 Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls for optimum triggering usually midrange over which trigger lights flash Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific trigger level voltages 7 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is
2. 2360 GOSUB 8480 l 2370 REMOTE A 2380 CLEAR l 2390 DISP Verify that the REMOTE and LISTEN status LEDs are lit 2400 DISP 2410 DISP FS 2420 PAUSE 2430 CLEAR 2440 DISP ES the 53348 B8 2450 DISP will be placed in the LOCAL LOCKQUT mode 2450 GOSUB 84850 2470 REMOTE A 2480 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 2490 CLEAR 2500 DISP Press the front panel LOCAL key to verify that the 5554A B8 is in 2518 DISP LOCAL LOCKOUT and remains in REMOTE 2520 DISP l 253 DISP F 2540 PAUSE 2550 CLEAR 4 52 Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 27u0 ea Sc S hPa PJ f ro Doa GS 2820 2830 2840 2850 2660 2870 2880 2890 2900 2810 2920 2930 2940 2950 2960 2970 2980 2890 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 30590 3060 OUTPUT A HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued DISP ES the 53244 B DISP will be placed in the LOCAL B0SUB 8480 LOCAL 7 CLEAR NISP C DISP REMOTE status LED is now unlit GOTO 7918 CHECKPOINT 3 pe Function Select Cum 60SUB 7810 DISP ES verify that DISP the FUNCTION key button DISP from FREQ A to DUM and back to DIZP to mark each function change DISP DISP USING t K 3 AS PAUSE REMOTE A OUTPUT A IN WAIT 1000 DUTPUT A FNI GOSUB 8540 3 FN2 GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A FNI GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A 3 FN4 SOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A 3 FNS GOSUB 8540 OUTP
3. 4 39 TIME INTERVAL A TO B TEST Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Time interval A to B specification Description Time Interval measuring accuracy is verified using a known generated signal HP 5334A B Performance Tests 5334A 8 3325A UNIVERSAL FUNCTION GENERATOR COUNTER i Figure 4 10 Time Interval A to B Test Setup Equipment Function Generator PIC WE Pere NERO ME HP 3325A Procedure 1 Set the function generator as follows FregUenCy secsi uean DET Sese ea raa 5 MHz Amplitudes Sese petaen E Gracia Sra eas enka 200 mV p p Function vesscvres e r a tuno go d dod Square Wave 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows E Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION eoo gs te bes Pado Aon UL Deu F A B 2 COMA ovesei Eva ek bbw OER AORN SOO E dede dd aa ON TOO GATE AVERAGE S rere FEX br eet US YE ERA ON uH SENSCES US dta da dev O diet i V ep A cs ed ere cdi SUL iude ON 2 A amp B TRIG SENS controls o e eX R RUEE a4 fully cw CHAN Aand B500 vediposti we Port stan enue tents ON E CHAN B Negative SLOPE sss ON failing edge i T 3 Connect the function generator output to the HP 5334A B Input A 1 VERIFY The Counter displays 100 ns 6 ns 4 Record the Time Interval measurement on the Performance Test Record line 35 Failure if the instrument under test does not meet the test specification consider performing the adjustments in Section V of
4. Frequency 2 cece cece hehehe 1 MHz NOTE Remove the 50 Ohm feedthrough connector 13 Set the HP 5334A B as follows VERIFY The Counter displays 1 MHz 0 04 Hz 14 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 5 15 Set the function generator as follows FrequenCy eeesseeee ehh hh 20 MHz VERIFY The Counter displays 20 MHz 0 3 Hz 16 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 6 Failure If any of these tests fail refer to Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 16 and 5 18 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 32 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 10 Hz 20 MHz Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A 8 Specifications for Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifications Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and four different frequency settings 4 16 per x aad SU rpm t re 31 eal bw ek d Q Rx Frequencies and conditions tested 10 Hz and 20 MHz dc coupled 1 Megohm 30 Hz and 20 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm 1 MHz and 20 MHz ac coupled 50 Ohm REF IN aga UNIVERSAL COUNTER 3325A ve reepTHRoucy FUNCTION GENERATOR Figure 4 3 Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 10 Hz 20 MHz Equipment Function Generator Dag beers DED Lass HP 3325A Procedure 1 Set the function generator as follows PICQUPNEY eme
5. 4 54 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 3580 WAIT 10900 360 OUTFUT A BSI 3810 S805UB 8540 S620 OUTPUT A BS BXI 3530 GO0S5UB 8540 3640 OUTPUT A BXO BAI 3B50 GOSUB 8540 35860 OUTPUT A BAO B21 3b70 GOSUB 8549 3B88 OUTPUT A BZO IN AUO 5690 CLEAR 3700 DISP The 52346 B is in the READ PEAKS Bmode 3718 DISP 3720 OUTPUT A IN FNIS 3730 DISP O8 shows 0 00 20 00 b 3740 DISF 3750 DISP F 3750 PAUSE 3770 CLEAR 5780 OUTPUT A IN AUG 3780 GOTO 7960 3800 3818 CHECKPOINT 6 3820 Trigger Levels i 3830 S 5840 GOSUB 7810 3850 DISP ES the 53344 B 3850 DISP uill be programmed to the trigger leveis below 35870 DISP 3880 DISP 2 34 1 56 L 3880 DISP 3800 PAUSE 3810 REMOTE A 3820 OUTPUT A TRO SEQ 3830 QUTPUT A AT 2 34 BT41 56 3840 OUTPUT A TRI FNI3 3850 CLEAR 3950 DISP D 3970 DISP reads 2 34 1 56 L 3880 DISP 3880 DISP FS 4000 PAUSE 4010 CLEAR amp 020 DISP Press RESET LOCAL 4030 DISP Press READ LEUELS 4 times 4040 DISP i 4050 DISP This sequence allows the triggerlevel control to return to the front panel 4060 DISP 4070 DISP Adjust the A and B LEVEL knobs for a different level reading 4080 DISP E i check that 4 55 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 4090 DISP the correct l
6. HP 5334A B Performance Tests Failure Perform Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 23 5 24 and 5 25 4 44 CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST HP 5334A This test is for HP 5334As containing Options 030 and 050 Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for the Channel C specifications Description Channel C is tested at various frequencies and signal levels IREF OUT sonl o ing o l lio o ollo sio nioo n DH OOO OO a in gio nig o DODO S G e I UNIVERSAL COUNTER l 5554A T BNC m TO N m 8860A 7C Is SIGNAL GENERATOR N w TO BNP 8491A OPTION O10 10 dB ATTENUATOR N f TO BNC Cf Figure 4 15 HP 5334A Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup Equipment Signal Generator Pints au id d ada duse pt HP 8660A C 10 dB Attenuator yc cr ae a ee ee HP 8491A Adapter N m to BNC m c0c cece HP 1250 0082 Adapter N f to BNC f 0 se eee ec ee HP 1250 1474 Adapter N m to BNC f 0 000005 HP 1250 0780 Procedure 1 Setthe signal generator as follows FrEGUENCY 1d obese veles Sata a a ON EPA 90 MHz PIPING P seein reais ich Os meh se 13 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A 4 33 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 3 Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A Input C th rough a 10 dB attenuat
7. QUTPUT A IN S0SUB 7380 L6 T C3 CHECKPOINT 1 Ies Memory Recall 210 GOSUB 7816 DISP N amp DISP IF NS HPS334A THEN 5320 DISP The 53348 does not have DISP this function DisP DISP 8 PAUSE 60SUB 8179 GOTO 8420 REMOTE A QUTPUT A sy IN DISP ES the 53346 DISP will be programmed to a certain measurement setup which will be stored 5350 Sor 5380 53808 5400 5410 5420 5430 5440 5450 5450 5470 5480 5490 5500 5510 5520 5550 5540 5550 5550 5578 5580 5580 58090 PAUSE CLEAR DISP Verify that the TI A B and SINGLE CYCLE annunciators are DISP OISP Pressing CONT again will cause the counter io do a power up OUTPUT amp 5 FNS TRI AT1 5 BTt 2 GSI GAA i PAUSE OUTPUT A MSS OUTPUT A CK BEEP CLEAR DISP E the counter DISP will recall its previous state PAUSE CLEAR OUTPUT A MR9 LOCAL DISP Verify that the counter is in the TIME INTERVAL mode DISP The SINGLE CYCLE annunciator is liti Press READ LEVELS DISP and verify that the display reads 1 5 1 20 L DISP DISP FS PAUSE GOTO 73850 then bbb reset J C C1 Mm Ch G3 om ao O3 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 1 CHECKPOINT ii Service Request S it GOSUB 7810 DISP For this test connect the TIME DISP BASE Output from the back panel DISP of the 532248 B to INPUT CHANN
8. Table 4 2 HP 5334A B Performance Test Record Card PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Page 1 of 3 HEWLETT PACKARD MODEL 5334A B UNIVERSAL COUNTER Repair Work Order No 0 a a Serial Number Temperature 1 5 LL Relative Humidity wu Date B Post Calibration Test Ci Notos c A Pre Calibration Test LINE NO MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM Test Performed By TEST DESCRIPTION 4 31 CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 10 Hz 20 MHz Input conditions 15 mV rms 10 Hz 9 07 AOS DC coupled 1 Megohm 20 MHz 19 97 PES era ore 20 03 15 mV rms 30 Hz 29 97 eer rn Ver er 30 03 AC coupled 1 Megohm 20 MHz 19 97 tas Se oe 20 03 15 mV rms 1 MHz 999999 96 TC eee 1000000 04 AC coupled 50 Ohm 20 MHz 19 97 a 20 03 4 32 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 10 Hz 20 MHz Input conditions 15 mV rms 10 Hz 07 MED 10 03 DC coupled 1 Megohm 20 MHz 19 97 REISEN TRES 20 03 15 mV rms 30 Hz 29 97 MESSER 30 03 AC coupled 1 Megohm 20 MHz 19 97 Suicide er 20 03 15 mV rms l 1 MHz 999999 96 i eetucmeciiuer 1000000 04 AC coupled 50 Ohm 20 MHz 19 97 CIPRO HOURS 20 03 4 33 CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 Instruments i e Front inputs only Input conditions 35 mV rms 80 MHz DC coupled 1 Megohm 79998998 00 80000002 00 100
9. 3 177 When the Internal Controls are enabled manually as described in the previous paragraph the last recall operation determines the trigger level values stored in the Internal Controls To return to front panel operation of the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls Internal Control must be turned off as described in paragraph 3 174 3 178 READ LEVELS Key 3 179 The READ LEVELS key selects the Peak Voltage mode of operation measuring trigger levels and peak voltages of periodic signals and dc voltages received through input channels A and or B Each time the READ LEVELS key pressed the counter displays the valuesstored in one of three stacked registers The trigger levels of the A and B input channels the upper and lower peaks of the signal at INPUT A and the upper and lower peaks of the signal at INPUT B shown in Figure 3 33 Pressing the READ LEVELS key a fourth time exits the Peak Voltage mode and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation When using the READ LEVELS function to measure a dc voltage at the appropriate input channel the A and or B channel readings will be displayed twice Figure 3 33 Channel B Peak Voltage Measurement Display 3 180 SLOPE START ARM STOP ARM Keys 3 181 The SLOPE key selects triggering on either the positive or negative slope of the input signals received through the corresponding input channel When the LED inside the key is OFF it indicates the positive slope is selected When the LED i
10. Connect signal to INPUT C jack Press FREQ C function key For 5334A only Set INPUT C SENSITIVITY control to minimum fully ccw Slowly rotate the control in a clockwise direction until the GATE light turns on 5 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to frequency measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Preset conditions on initial selection of FREQ C Lockout conditions during FREQ C mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT diis HP IB COMMAND SADS HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE no lockout fe qe c 100 GATE AVERAGE no lockout EXT ARM SELECT no lockout MATH DISABLE no lockout AUTO TRIG AUT Figure 3 47 Frequency C Measurements 3 53 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF Connect signal to INPUT A jack Press PERIOD A function key Set AC DC 500 Z 1M0 and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position LED ON rotate TRIGGER LEVEL SENS contr
11. I x OB HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 350 Oncethe calibration data has been output it may be used for several measurements in the same mode Calibration data is combined with the high speed data in the following equation to calculate T corrected TIME ST ccc SP aaa T corrected T add SO DET where ST and SP are the Interpolator Start count and Stop count respectively and Tis the contents of the MRC T register from the High Speed Output data NOTE Add an offset of 256 to negative numerators between 5 and 256 Then T corrected is used to calculate the desired measurement For example Time Interval T corrected X 100 ns E Frequency F corrscted X 100 ns where is the contents of the MRC E register from the High Speed Output data NOTE Refer to Programming Examples paragraph 3 359 for a sample program to translate the high speed output and the calibration data into frequency measurements 3 351 Ratio measurements are calculated by determining E T or T E from the High Speed Output data where the MRC E register contains the count from Input B and the MRC T register contains the count from Input A NOTE Since FREQ C measurements are prescaled by 20 the E register count must be multiplied by 20 to calculate the actual frequency 3 352 Error Handling 3 353 Certain conditions will produce an error or failure state in the HP 5334A B Fail messages typically occur during the po
12. Parameter disallowed in present mode Attenuators controlled by AUTO TRIG 50 ohm B AC B settings preset by COM A Slope B set by Slope A in Rise Fall mode Parameter disallowed in High Speed mode HP 1B Calibration data unaccessible in present mode HP 1B Invalid key entry Data outside valid range Data exceeds maximum resolution Mantissa digit buffer full Decimal point previously entered Multiple key closures Mnemonic not recognizable Numeric syntax error Alpha character expected Data exceeds valid range Attention ATN asserted in Talk Only mode Store instrument setup operation failed X 7 register number 0 9 Recall instrument setup operation failed X register number 0 9 HP 1B address cannot be recalled at power up address defaults to 03 I IU ERA FECI g Bs Sak Ba gue CT M eT tex iex f devis ou d HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 4 Failure Messages TYPE DISPLAY MESSAGE DESCRIPTION EXECUTIVE 6 0 internal ROM U19 failure PROCESSOR 6 1 Internal RAM U19 failure MEASUREMENT 7 0 Internal ROM U29 or RAM U29 failure PROCESSOR MRC 7 1 MRC U20 register problem EXT or E T 0 7 2 U29 1 O Port 5 failure 7 3 U29 O Port 1 failure 7 4 U29 VO Port 0 failure 7 89 U29 I O Port 4 failure HP IB 8 0 ROM U17 failure PROCESSOR 8 1 RAM UT7 failure PROCESSOR 9 0 Executive Processor U19 not responding DATA 9 1 Measurement Processor U29 not respond
13. 1 nanosecond to 1 000 seconds The minimum START STOP pulse width is 5 nanoseconds HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 12 CN 9 MIN e START zd 3 CHANNEL A CHANNEL 8 ns d MEASURED MINIMUM START STOP PULSE WIDTH S ns Figure 3 13 Time Interval Measurement 3 65 When using separate sources for the START and STOP signals the START signal connectsto INPUT A the STOP signal connects to INPUT B and the COM A key must be in the SEPARATE position The appropriate input signal conditioning may then be selected When both the START and STOP signals are derived from the same signal the signal connects to INPUT A andthe COM A key must besetto the COMMON position LED on The controls may be adjusted as described for separate signal sources 3 66 The position of the corresponding SLOPE key determines whether the trigger point for the START or STOP signal will be on the rising or falling edge If the signals are not repetitive AUTO TRIG should be turned off Then the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls may be adjusted to the desired trigger points Triggering is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER lights Trigger level controls must be set within the triggering range to generate a count The trigger levels may be determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key The voltages displayed will be within the accuracy and resolution specified in Table 1 1 3 67 Actual gate time is controlled by the mea
14. 1870 DISP If an ERROR occurred 1880 DISP Recheck option configuration 1830 DISP Cycle power switch on 53344 8 1800 DISP Press RUN to restart program 1310 DISP 1820 DISP Otherwise press CONT 1930 DISP 1840 PAUSE 1850 SET TIMEOUT 7 0 1980 1978 CHECKPOINT 1980 I Power up Preset 199 Saj 20090 GOSUB 7819 2010 DISP Toggle the S3344 B line switch from ON to OFF then back to ON 2020 DISP 2030 DISP epe that all lamps turn on 2040 DISP momentarily the dispiay flashes 050 DISP HP 53248 or HP S334b the 4 51 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 20850 DISP HP IB address and the word 2070 DISP PASP 2280 DISP BS 080 PAUSE 2100 CLEAR 2110 DISP The counter goes through am ex tensive self test on power up 2120 DISP I any failures are found they are immediately indicated with aFAIL message 2138 DISP 2140 IF F THEN 2170 Option 700 installed 2158 DISP PRESET Hz FREQ A and AUTO TRIGannunciators are lit 2160 GOTO 2180 l 2170 DISP PRESET Hz FREQ A AUTO TRIG and DISABLE annunciators are Fite 2180 DISP 2189 DISP DS shows 7 7 2200 DISP 2210 DISP 2220 DISP USING t K p FS 2230 PAUSE 2240 IF Fs2 THEN 2250 2250 OUTPUT A GAL 2250 GOTO 7850 2270 2280 CHECKPGINT 2 l 22890 I Remote Local Local Lockout 2300 5 2 2310 GOSUB 78140 2320 LOCAL 7 2320 ABORTIO 7 2340 DISP ES the S3354A B 2350 DISP will be placed under remote control
15. 3 239 The HP 5334A is provided with an internal battery for front panel continuous memory ithis feature is not available for the HP 5334B The battery is recharged only when the POWER key is in the ON position 3 240 OPERATOR S CHECKS the basic operation of the HP 5334A B8 Universal Counter These checks are not intended to verify the overall accuracy or performance specifications of the instrument They should however provide the operator with a quick method of determining that the counter is operating properly Operator s checks are providedin two levels The operator should perform both tests 3 241 The following procedures will verify a Power up Self check b Diagnostic Sequence P CAUTION 3 Before switching on the instrument ensure the following 1 The transformer primary is matched to the available line voltage paragraph 3 210 HP 5334A or paragraph 3 212 HP 5334B 9 The correct fuse is installed paragraph 3 233 3 Allsafety precautions and warnings have been observed Section and il 3 242 Power Up Self Check 3 243 To perform the Power Up Self Check after the HP 5334A B has been turned ON cycle the POWER switch to STANDBY then back to ON When the POWER is cycled back ON an internal check is made of the display and the microprocessors and related circuitry During this cycle all front panel display segments and indicators will light momentarily followed by the momentary display of
16. 3 63 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming FEN 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF 3 Connect signal to INPUT A jack 4 Press FREQ A function key 5 Press AC DC 500 Z 1MQ and SLOPE A key to appropriate positions 6 Adjust GATE TIME setting if required Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to frequency measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 7 Press READ LEVELS key two times Upper and lower peak levels will be displayed l PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS B Preset conditions on initial selection of PEAK LEVELS Lockout conditions during PEAK LEVELS mode f EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SEFHNG HP IB COMMAND SEINS HP IB COMMAND ISINGLE CYCLE OFF GS0 no lockout 400 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO ON GV1 EXT ARM SELECT disabled in PEAK LEVELS ON MDI ON AUT controlled by AUTO TRIG MATH DISABLE X10 ATTN OFF SEO OFF TRO disabled in PEAK LEVELS SENS DACS 5334A only IGATE TIME ENTRY Figure 3
17. 4 the adjustments in Section V of the Service Manual as a first step in correcting the problem d 4 42 RISE FALL TIME A TEST Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for the Rise Fall specifications 4 29 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Description The Rise Fall time function of the HP 5334A B is exercised at several different frequencies and slope settings 53534A B 3325A UNIVERSAL l FUNCTION GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 4 13 Rise Fall Time A Test Setup Equipment Function Generator Jienssosk us n ERR AXE RS HP 3325A Procedure 1 Set the function generator as follows Frequency 6 eee cece ee eee hen nnn 10 MHz Amplitude 00 cece scree cece nnn 500 mV p p Function ades Cad Sew p KE ESTER ERO ois oe Sees Sine Wave 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION 22 D seitsedied edis M ME NET RISE FALL A CHANNEL SOM ao cdeszcs GRADU eue era i te ON 3 Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A B Input A VERIFY The Counter displays 30 ns 10 ns Rise Time 4 Record the rise measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 38 5 Set the HP 5334A B as follows CHAN A Negative SLOPE ssees ON falling edge VERIFY The Counter displays 30 ns 10 ns Fall Time 6 Record the fall measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 39 7 Set the function generator as follows Frequency 1 cece eee enhn nnn
18. 8076 Temperature Coefficient 10V Range 0 0055 of reading 0 5 mV C 100V Range 0 0055 of reading 5 mV C 1000V Range 0 008 of reading 5 mV C input Type Floating Pair Input Resistance 10 MN 1 Maximum Input High to low 1000V in all ranges Low to chassis ground 500V in ail ranges Response Time 800 ms to within 1 of final value within one range Normal Mode Rejection 30 dB at 50 60 Hz Effective Common Mode Rejection 1 kf unbalance 2110 dB at 50 60 Hz Filter Single pole from 10 Hz NOMINAL OPTION 030 1300 MHz C Channel Input Characteristics Range 90 MHz to 1300 MHz Sensitivity 15 mV rms 23 5 dBm sine wave 90 MHz to 1000 MHz 75 mV rms 9 5 dBm sine wave 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz Error Per Point log scale 2 i i i mae r Rise Fall 10 ps 1 Vims 10 mM us 100 mV us 1V us 10 mV ns 100 mM ns 1 Vins 18 mV ps input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point log scale Graph 5 Trigger Level Setting Error Affects both the Start and Stop points of ali time interval measurements HP 5334A B General Information Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications Continued HP 5334A only Sensitivity can be decreased continuously by up to 20 dB NOMINAL from 90 MHz to 1000 MHz and 14 dB NOMINAL from 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz using the sensitivity control Dynamic Range HP 53344 15 mV rms to 500 mV rms 30 5
19. EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Display Arming States Selected 3 198 Pressing the START ARM or STOP ARM key while the EXT ARM SELECT key is enabled will change the corresponding arming state After the desired states have been selected the EXT ARM SELECT key must be pressed again to record the changes Pressing the RESET LOCAL key will exit the entry mode without changing the arming status If either slope has been set on the EXT ARM SELECT key LED will remain on to indicate external arming is enabled Any combination of these three states can be selected to arm the counter To DISABLE arming the START ARM and STOP ARM must both be set to arming off m A OLG HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 199 The EXT ARM SELECT key displays the arming status and allows the START ARM and or STOP ARM states to be changed The EXT ARM SELECT key operates as follows a When START ARM and STOP ARM are both set to the arming off position 1 Each time the EXT ARM SELECT key is pressed it toggles ON or OFF 2 The LED inside the key turns ON or OFF respectively 3 When the EXT ARM SELECT key is ON it enables the ARM ENTRY mode OFF returns the counter to the previous mode of operation NOTE Pressing the EXT ARM SELECT key does NOT enable external arming The counter will not make any measurements while the EXT ARM SELECT key is in the ARM ENTRY mode The EXT ARM SELECT key ailows external arming to be enabled or disabl
20. GA 5 commands to the 5334A B The command IN initializes counter to known state FREQ A mode on GA 5 sets gate time to 500 ms Read 5334A B measurement into A Send contents of A to HP 85 screen Return to LINE 30 End program execution a LAE 4 4 cera prue kr HP 5334A B Operation and Programming a EXAMPLE 5 B TYPICAL MEASUREMENT FORMAT This example demonstrates how the controller can be used to display a measurement every 5 seconds After i a measurement is accepted the counter waits for the next read command to be executed During the wait statement although the counter is addressed to talk it will check to make sure the listening device is ready for data if the controller is not ready to accept data the counter will stop trying to output the data and start a new measurement in this example the HP 5334A B will continue to make measurements without sending data until 5 seconds have elapsed After 5 seconds the next measurement is read and sent to the HP 85 screen Note the check is done only for the first character of a measurement data string Subsequent characters are automatically sent if the listening device is ready for data LINE 10 Dimension A to 19 characters LINE 20 Send IN command to the 5334A B The command IN initializes the counter to a known state FREQ A mode on LINE 30 Read 5334A B measurement into A LINE 40 Send contents of A to HP 85 sc
21. OUTPUT 703 FN1 AT1 FI1 GA2 OUTPUT 703 fn 1at1 00f 1 ga 2E1 3 308 DEVICE COMMAND DEFINITIONS 3 309 A device command is a sequence of two or more ASCII coded bytes sent to the HP 5334A B over the HP 1B that causes the counter to perform a specific function Before discussing the individual commands they will be defined according to type in the following paragraphs a NUMERIC commands Type N a sequence of two ASCII coded bytes followed by a sequence of bytes representing a free format decimal number and a terminator see paragraph 3 307 A termination may also be implied with the start of the next command Numeric entry is discussed in detailed in paragraph 3 310 Equivalent numeric command examples OUTPUT 703 MN12 3456 OUTPUT 703 MN F1 23456E 01 OUTPUT 703 MN1 23456E1 _ Normalize 12 3456 b BINARY command Type B a sequence of two ASCII coded bytes followed by either a0 or a 1 The 0 indicates the selected functions is OFF or FALSE and the 1 indicates ON or TRUE The numeric input is processed in the same format as numeric commands except that the range of values accepted is only 0 and 1 Binary command examples OUTPUT 703 WA1 OUTPUT 703 WA1 23 True 1 OUTPUT 703 WAQ OUTPUT 703 WAO 1 False 0 E t eue em i fae A yes p HP 5334A B Operation and Programming E C INTEGER commands Type l a sequence of two ASCII coded bytes followed by a
22. The front panel TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls are disabled when AUTO TRIG is ON or when DACS are ON and the trigger levels are controlled internally If you are operating an HP 5334A then refer to paragraphs 3 170 and 3 171 for further details on selecting HP 5334A B Operation and Programming the internal trigger levels via the DACS After the HP 5334B s TRIGGER LEVEL SENS has been operating in the AUTO TRIG mode the foilowing steps must be performed to regain front panel control of the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control 1 Press RESET LOCAL 2 Press READ LEVELS key described in paragraph 3 178 three times this will cycle the 5334B out of the READ LEVELS mode The TRIGGER LEVEL SENS knob should now control the trigger and sensitivity levels 5V TRIGGER LEVEL ADJUSTABLE TRIGGER OVER 5 VOLTS WITH z5V LEVEL SENSITIVITY CONSTANT AT MAX SENSITIVITY MAX 77 715 mV Rrms L N gt V MIN gt 500 mV rms SENSITIVITY ADJUSTABLE FROM MAX T 15 mV TO 300 mV 15 mV rms WITH TRIGGER LEVEL CONSTANT AT O VOLTS Figure 3 31 Trigger Level Sensitivity Control Application 3 168 SENS Key 3 169 The SENS key sets the function of the corresponding TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control to either Trigger Level or Sensitivity mode In the Trigger Level mode blue key indicator OFF sensitivity is preset to MAX and trigger levels are variable In Sensitivity mode blue key indicator ON trigger level is preset to 0 volts and the sensitivit
23. X10 X1 ATTN SLOPE and TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls operate independently 5 Press SENS key to TRIGGER LEVEL position LED OFF Thissets the sensitivity to maximum and allows variable selection of trigger levels gora 6 Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controis for optimum triggering usually midrange over which trigger lights flash Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific trigger level voltages 7 Adjust GATE TIME DELAY setting for preferred delay time between Start on Channel A and enabling of the a Stop signal on Channel B Potential Stop events are ignored during the specified delay Delay time is displayed lll by pressing GATE TIME DELAY key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME DELAY key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME DELAY key again to store selected setting in memory and return to time interval delay measurement E mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 m NOTE ja The first measurement is not displayed until the gate time E delay has elapsed PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Lockout conditions during TIME Preset conditions on initial selection of T I A B DELAY INTERVAL DELAY mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT SEEN HP IB COMMAND PONG HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE OFF no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF no lockout iEXT ARM SELECT OFF no lockout MATH DISABLE ON no lockout Figure 3 50 Time Interval Delay Mea
24. cable iockscrew illustration and part number follow Logic Leveis The Hewlett Packard interface Bus logic levels are TTL compatible i e the true 1 state is 0 0V dc to 0 4V dc and the false 0 state is 2 5V dc to 5 0V dc Programming and Output Data Format Refer to Section III Operation Mating Connector HP 1251 0293 Amphenol 57 30240 Mating Cabies Available HP 10833A 1 metre 3 3 ft HP 108338 2 metres 6 6 ft HP 10833C 4 metres 13 2 ft HP 10833D 1 2 metre 1 6 ft Cabling Restrictions i1 A Hewlett Packard interface Bus System may contain no more than 2 metres 6 6 ft of connecting cable per instrument 2 The maximum accumulative length of connecting cable for any Hewlett Packard Inter face Bus System is 20 0 metres 65 6 ft 9 The maximum number of instruments in one system is fifteen Figure 2 3 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Connection a eye d HP 5334A B Operation and Programming SECTION il OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 Thissection provides complete operating and programming information for the HP Model 5334A B Universal Counter Operating characteristics and various modes of operation are explained Descriptions of ail front and rear panel controls connectors and indicators are provided including detailed instructions for operation programming and operator s checks 3 3 The information contained in this section is as follows Operating
25. consider performing the adjustments in Section V of the Service Manual as a first step in correcting the problem 4 41 RATIO A B TEST Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Ratio A B specification 4 28 HP 5334A B e Performance Tests Description Two different frequencies are applied to the A and B inputs Theratio of the A andB inputs will be displayed o efi oodiice aim ina 5334A B 3325A UNIVERSAL 3 4 FUNCTION GENERATOR i COUNTER 1 Figure 4 12 Ratio A B Test Setup 1 Equipment z Function Generator 22 cients eve men d s a AQUAE HP 3325A i Procedure 4 1 Set the function generator as follows IO Ue Cy a eaan gers In eO edd d s iter odd date d 5 MHz 3 Amplitude 2o hen erara ea o TA EC P 100 mV rms T FURC OD za Las E E Rx Ux er ean ea Ie vus DINE Wave n 2 Setthe HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the HP 5334A B T T FUNGCHON Aarle xa CORDE oe D e PETERET RATIO A B SENSN qi a aa atesdev ur Aba wa vic ea pd Le Lan ss ON 4 A amp B TRIG SENS control os oL Le pae ss fully cw CHAN A B SU et basa eb CERE tU eaten are ieee S ON 1 3 Connect HP 5334A B TIME BASE signal to Input A and connect the function generator d signal to Input B 1 VERIFY The Counter displays 2 000 000 000 001 4 Record the Ratio A B measurement on the Test Record Card line 37 4 d Failure If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification consider performing
26. s s Ug i T NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and ND amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 dir V Press POWER switch to ON position 2 Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF M 3 Connect signal to INPUT A jack 4 Press PULSE WIDTH A function key AUTO TRIG will automatically turn on pe tht AE 5 Press AC DC and 500 Z 1MQ keys to appropriate positions i 6 Press Channel A SLOPE key for positive LED OFF or negative LED ON pulse measurements ee 7 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key P Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected settinginmemory and f return to pulse width measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 F NOTE The first measurement is not displayed until the gate time ora delay has elapsed E PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS i ies Lockout conditions during PULSE gus Preset conditions on initial selection o PULSE WIDTH A WIDTH mode boo EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT ee ELUNG HP IB COMMAND PETUNG HP iB COMMAND ne I SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout E i 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO no lockout EXT ARM SELECT OFF XA2 XO2 no lockout pes MATH DISABLE ON MD1 no lockout E AUTO TRIG ON AUT OFF AUO E X10 ATTN controlled by
27. 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF 3 Connect signal to INPUT A and or INPUT B jack 4 Press desired function key 5 Press AC DC 500 Z 1M0 and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions 6 Adiust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control within range over which trigger light flashes if desired NOTE when AUTO TRIG is off appropriate attenuation must be selected manually 7 Adjust GATE TIME setting if required Gate time is displayed by pressing GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to frequency measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 8 Press READ LEVELS key Readjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control to specific voltage level according to measurement application PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS P T Lockout conditions during TRIGGER Preset conditions on initial selection of TRIGGER LEVELS LEVELS mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SETTING HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE OFF no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GV1 JEXT ARM SELECT disabled in TRIG LEVELS XA1 XA3 XO1 XO3 IMATH DISABLE ON MD1 MDO AUTO TRIG OFF AUO AUT GATE TIME ENTRY disabled in TRIG LEVELS GA lt n gt Figure 3 57 Trigger Level Measurements
28. 25 C environment with 20 Vde Oven Supply voltage applied 2 oscillator off time was less than 24 hours 3 oscillator aging rate was 5 x 107 per day prior to turn off Final value is defined as oscillator frequency 24 hours after turn on MANUAL CHANGES MODEL 5334A 05334 deed SERIAL PREFIX OR SERIAL NUMBER PAGE 3 49 OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING All Serials Table 3 4 Failure Messages 2Change Message Description for Error 9 4 to read Inter processor handshake failure gt Add NOTE following Table 3 4 NOTE For the remote control of the TOTALIZE function with external arming you must set the external arm after FN9 the TOTALIZE START command Example OUTPUT 703 FN9 XAl XAQ 4 l Measurement Starts Here PAGE 4 39 PERFORMANCE TESTS All Serials gt Change 10 to 100 at the VERIFY step PAGE 4 43 PERFORMANCE TESTS All Serials gt Change Revision G to Revision K in the last line of paragraph 4 47 PAGE 4 57 TABLE 4 4 HP IB VERIFICATION PROGRAM LISTING Cont d All Serials gt Change line 6390 to read as follows 6390 OUTPUT A INVALID COMMAND HP 5334A B Safety Considerations SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS GENERAL This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation This product is a Safety Class instrument provided with a protective earth terminal BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product
29. 80 MHz 2 Hz 9 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 15 10 Set the signal generator as follows FTO dub CV orato Phe due daba Ca dus atc Lee en 100 MHz PMA OU it ara ta brn desi ores ta De sa Ar E IS 35 mV rms VERIFY The Counter displays 100 MHz 2 Hz 11 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 16 12 Set the signal generator as follows Fregue bt iliac een use a ka a du Dt a poda a 80 MHz PI OUI dB Less zer ls ba a LA IE Et e 35 mV rms NOTE Remove the 50 Ohm feedthrough connector 13 Set the HP 5334A B as follows VERIFY The Counter displays 80 MHz 2 Hz 14 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 17 4 19 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 15 Set the signal generator as follows FREQUENCY Ac iscssensed tances bene bein hne 100 MHz Amplitude i ise ecca retos ra o ERR ie teet 35 mV rms VERIFY The Counter displays 100 MHz 2 Hz 16 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 18 Failure If any of these tests fail referto Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 16 and 5 18 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 34 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 Instruments This test is for instruments that do not contain Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs i e instrument with Front Inputs only Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for
30. AUTO TRIG ON _ AXT BX1 SENS SEO ae DACS 5334A only TRO Figure 3 54 Pulse Width Measurements l pe HP 5334A B Operation and Programming qal 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD j NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 7 Press POWER switch to ON position Connect signal to INPUT A jack Press RISE FALL TIME A function key AUTO TRIG and COM A will automatically turn on Press CHANNEL A AC DC and 500 Z 1MQ keys to appropriate positions wk f Nm oa Press Channel A SLOPE key positive LED OFF for rise time measurements negative LED ON for fall time measurements 6 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to rise fall time measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 NOTE The first measurement is not displayed until the gate time delay has elapsed PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Preset conditions on inital selection of RISE FALL TIME A Lockout conditions during RISE FALL TIME mode EQUIVALENT SPRING EQUIVALENT HP IB COMMAND J HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE no lockout XT ARM S
31. CAMP 10 Hz Ampit de resesi sas RESTE ERU LORS pU Rc 15 mV rms FUNCION saora Ead Ded dt XN ea tp cU arbo ER Sine Wave 2 Setthe HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION 25 e ewdsc ean EE oben teda REDE Lis FREQ B SENS cu Site pd aa AEE d a EE pps dua a A yb baile tacked Eth ON CHAN B TRIG SENS control oso ces s phe IER rA fully cw HP 5334A B Performance Tests 3 Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A B put B using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 3 4 Repeat the tests of paragraph 4 31 for Channel B and record the measurements on the Performance Test Record Card lines 7 through 12 Begin the tests at the verification of 10 Hz in paragraph 4 31 step 4 Failure If any of these tests fail referto Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 17 and 5 19 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 17 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 18 4 33 CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 instruments This test is for instruments that do not contain the Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs i e instruments with Front Inputs only Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifications Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and two different frequency settings Frequencies and conditions tested 80 MHz and 100 M
32. DVM Options 020 and 050 HP 5334A Only csse 4 25 Channel C Options 030 and 050 HP 5334A ce seer eens 4 26 Channel C Options 030 HP 5334B 1 ec cece cece ence ees 4 27 Performance Tests c 0 ccc csc ce ete n ene sncncesecenetesoess 4 30 Preliminary Procedure 00 cece eee eee nnn 4 31 Channel A Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 10 Hz 20 MHZ reso ee ee wa eee eee me e 4 32 Channel B Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 10 Hz 20 MHZ paki see ke hh Er ran Rh hys 4 33 Channel A Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 Instruments 4 34 Channel B Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 instruments 4 35 Channel A Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 Instruments 4 36 Channel B Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 Instruments 4 37 Period A Test cuc e ere n reas ape aa aee 4 38 Pulse Width A Test ccc ccc eee eee tenn htt 4 39 Time Interval A to B Test 2 ccc eee ee eee ee nnn 4 40 Time Interval A to B Delay Test 0 ec ce een e eee e rere ence 4 41 Ratio AZB Test ccc ccc ceca pene sheer ttr 4 42 Rise Fall Time A Test ose eene hahent 4 43 DVM Accuracy Test Options 020 and 050 HP 5334A only 4 44 Channel C Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test HP 5334A 0
33. Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifications Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and two different frequency settings Frequencies and conditions tested 80 MHz and 100 MHz dc coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 50 Ohm F REF IN 8660A C 500 FEEDTHROUGH SIGNAL GENERATOR 5334A B8 UNIVERSAL COUNTER Figure 4 5 Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 80 MHz 100 MHz Equipment Signal Generator iie nn HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequehity senos Mecum e E PAIRS SHUEMU Ra 80 MHz Amplitude A E pcdtpabaa erasa c TEM EDS 4 20 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FOUNGCHON catodacid voa ex rptu de COL Y RES d anc ats FREQ B SENS Sed ese ase Macias ad er pu aute toa ei Rf ON CHAN B TRIG SENS control iesu soswced eee ds fully cw 3 Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A B Input B using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 5 4 Repeat the tests of paragraph 4 33 for Channel B and record the measurements on the Performance Test Record Card lines 19 through 24 Begin the tests at the verification of 80 MHz in paragraph 4 33 step 4 Failure If any of these tests fail refer to Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 17 and 5 19 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 35 C
34. HP 5334A rear panel contains a Arm Trigger Level potentiometer for adjusting the arming signal trigger level from 4V to 4V The HP 53348 does not have this type of adjustment instead the arming signal trigger level is preset to 1 5V After the desired states have been selected the EXT ARM SELECT key must be pressed again to record any changes and return the counter to a measurement mode of operation Pressing the RESET LOCAL key during the ARM ENTRY mode will immediately exit the entry mode and return the counter to the previous mode of operation However any changes to the arming states will not be recorded d When external arming is enabled i e either SLOPE key is set to an ON position 1 2 The EXT ARM SELECT key LED remains ON The ARM light in the display turns ON when the counter is armed to START STOP a measurement and waiting for an input signal edge Each time the EXT ARM SELECT key is pressed the ARM ENTRY modeturnsonor off however the key LED does not turn OFF The ARM ENTRY mode operates in the same manner as previously discussed paragraph c External arming is disabled by enabling the ARM ENTRY mode and setting the START ARM and STOP ARM states back to arming off The EXT ARM SELECT key must be pressed again to record the status change NOTE The START ARM and STOP ARM must BOTH be set back to ARMING OFF to DISABLE arming gmn est ike Lok wed pee LEM Mr SE t
35. K1 to perform the next checkpoint REPEAT Press K3 to repeat this checkpoint GOTO Press K4 to select an arbitrary checkpoint de o KU OPER GUA GER GLARE i 44d Pb MV PS MOM GT GM E GER GEM GXD GS GAB Due am 12 The format of the program allows the user to proceed in a sequential order to the next checkpoint repeat the present checkpoint or go to an arbitrary checkpoint 13 When GO TO has been selected the following prompt occurs Enter checkpoint number desired O0 to 14 and press END LINE O TERMINATES PROGRAM 14 Entering a number other than 0 causes that checkpoint to be executed If 0 is entered the program terminates by displaying the checkpoint results and providing the option to receive a printed version An example of the printed checkpoint results is shown below HHH HEHEHE RII E CHECKPOINT RESULTS FOR HP IB ADDRESS 703 HHT HHMI HEHEHE CHECKPOINT 1 PASS 2 PASS 3 PASS 4 FAIL 9 NOT PERFORMED 6 PASS 7 PASS 8 NOT PERFORMED 9 PASS 10 FAIL 11 NOT PERFORMED 12 NOT PERFORMED 13 PASS 14 FAIL 4 46 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 3 HP 5334A B HP IB Verification Test Record Card Hewlett Packard Company Model 5334A B Universal Counter f Serial Number ____ 3 amp i f PARAGRAPH NO j HP IB Test Attach results here 1 Power up Preset Remote Local Local Lockout Function Select Input Conditioning Channel A Input Conditioning Cha
36. MHz 35 mV rms 80 MHz AC coupied 99999998 00 100000002 00 79999998 00 80000002 00 1 Megohm 100 MHz 99999998 00 uu 100000002 00 35 mV rms 80 MHz 79999998 00 80000002 00 AC coupled 50 Ohm 100 MHz 99999998 00 100000002 00 4 39 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 2 HP 5334A B Performance Test Record Card Continued HP 5334A B PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Page 2 of 3 RESULTS LINE NO MINIMUM PARA NO TEST DESCRIPTION ACTUAL MAXIMUM 4 34 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Non Option 060 Instruments i e Front inputs oniy input conditions 35 mV rms 80 MHz 19 79999998 00 80000002 00 DC coupled 1 Megohm 100 MHz 20 99999998 00 100000002 00 35 mV rms 80 MHz 21 79999998 00 80000002 00 AC coupled 1 Megohm 100 MHz 22 99999998 00 100000002 00 35 mV rms 80 MHz 23 79999998 00 80000002 00 AC coupled 50 Ohm 100 MHz 24 99999998 00 100000002 00 4 35 CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 instruments i e Front and Rear Inputs Input conditions 50 mV rms 80 MHz 25 79999998 00 80000002 00 DC coupled 1 Megohm 100 MHz 26 99999998 00 100000002 00 50 mV rms 80 MHz 27 79999998 00 80000002 00 AC coupled 1 Megohm 100 MHz 28 99999998 00 100000002 00 4 36 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 Instruments i e Front and
37. Measurements lt lt d054 ost ee aa vera Hobe 4 E TEES 3 77 Voltage Measurements applies only to HP 5334A with Option 020 sssssesesrssresrreresrebererreasereess 3 79 Pulse Width Measurements essen nnn 3 82 Rise Fall Time Measurements seen nnn 3 85 Peak Voltage Measurements cieeee e nnn 3 88 Initial Power Up Checks and Self Diagnostics eese 3 92 front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors ses 3 94 POWER STANDBY ON Key MAR e a MUR aie eee ane Cod 3 97 RESET LOCAL Key 2 aaa hr o hrs docete uds 3 99 Front Panel Controls iva cue eta tra c Cbr da REN inar 3 103 Front Panel MEMORY applies to HP 5334A only 3205 GATE GIOUD socer onis soon Cutisa Mapas t veu ene th 3 107 GATE TIME DELAY Key sasha ye Ch ux ERR dene e n SAI SINGLE CYCLE Key aint rana EANA E een ke teas 3 113 100 GATE AVERAGE Key cccccccccscerecnseccercsces 3 115 MATH MEMORY Group esee rte nere nh nr sa JSELECT ENTER EG eset io endi tutis eO PIRE AA Dien 3 124 DISABLE KG cera aao Reb E Feed o bU Vu e nytt 3 126 STORE Key HP 5334A only eese Tineo Nota Eae 3 130 RECALL Key HP 5334A only ves sadinge cee etr eng 3 135 FUNCTION DATA Group eeeee enter hn 3 137 FREQ A Key iussi ee eet ee ps as Fu RERO E CAU CM C E AU 3 139 PERIOD A Key eise ee te ves So EONS Ae BRAG Ur E ERA RII 3 141 RATIO A B Key diaexdcia Ei eae qub amp Re masala d
38. ON 4 13 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Procedure 1 Set the HP 5334A B as follows POWER ices ERRARE ERR EE EAR Yd d STANDBY TIME BASE sca al ato akon eae eee pee INT rear panel 2 Connect the HP 5334A B as follows 5334A B Power Cable e to Line Voltage Observe STANDBY LED is ON 3 The HP 5334A B Time Base oscillator is used as the reference for the other instruments in these tests Connect the HP 5334A B rear panel TIME BASE signal to both the function generator and the signal generator Set these instruments to operate on the external time base from the HP 5334A B Figure 4 1 33254 5334A B 8660A C FUNCTION GENERATOR UNIVERSAL COUNTER SIGNAL GENERATOR Figure 4 1 Time Base Reference Setup 4 34 CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 10 Hz 20 MHz Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifications Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and four different frequency settings Frequencies and conditions tested 10 Hz and 20 MHz dc coupled 1 Megohm 30 Hz and 20 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm 1 MHz and 20 MHz ac coupled 50 Ohm HP 5334A B Performance Tests REF IN REF OUT S325A S334A B UNIVERSAL COUNTER Figure 4 2 Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 10 Hz 20 MHz Equipment Function Gener tor v
39. Programming via the HP IB paragraph 3 260 for further information A sro The SRQ annunciator lights when the 5334A B sends a service requestto the controller in charge of the HP IB Refer to Remote Programming via the HP IB paragraph 3 260 for further information D ors The OFS annunciator lights when the mathematical operation addition has been performed on the measurement displayed other than the default 0 OFFSET or when the counter is in the math entry mode ind cating an OFFSET value may be entered D NML The NML annunciator lights when the mathematicl operation division has been performed on the measurement displayed other than the defauit 41 NORMALIZE or when the counter is in the math entry mode indicating a NORMALIZE value may be entered B ENTRY The ENTRY annunciator flashes when the instrument is in a data entry mode and is waiting for a user specified constant to be entered For example when the MATH SELECT ENTER EXT ARM SELECT MEMORY STORE or RECALL or the GATE TIME function key is enabled Whenan error or fail message is displayed while in a data entry mode the ENTRY light remains on steadily 4D PRESET The PRESET annunciator lights whenever AUTO TRIG or the DACS are on 5334A only and the trigger sensitivity levels are set internally The TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls are disabled when PRESET is on D ARM The ARM annunciator lights whenever the counter is externally armed made ready
40. Rear Inputs input conditions 50 mV rms 80 MHz 29 79999998 00 80000002 00 DC coupied 1 Megohm 100 MHz 30 99999998 00 100000002 00 50 mV rms 80 MHz oi 79999998 00 80000002 00 AC coupled 1 Megohm 100 MHz 32 99999998 00 100000002 00 4 37 PERIOD A TEST 50 mV rms 100 MHz sine wave 33 9 9999999 ns 10 0000001 ns 4 38 PULSE WIDTH A TEST 200 mV rms 100 MHz sine wave 34 1 ns 9 ns 4 39 TIME INTERVAL A TO B TEST 200 mV p p 5 MHz square wave 35 94 ns 106 ns 4 40 TIME INTERVAL A TO B DELAY TEST 200 mV p p 100 Hz square wave 36 14 9 ms 15 1 ms 4 40 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 2 HP 5334A B Performance Test Record Card Continued HP 5334A B PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Page 3 of 3 a RESULTS PARA Y NO TEST DESCRIPTION LINE NO MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM 4 41 RATIO A B 100 mV rms 5 MHz sine wave 37 1 999999 m 2 000001 4 42 RISE FALL TIME A TEST 500 mV p p 100 MHz sine wave irise 38 20 ns pH 40 ns ifall 39 20 ns MM RE 40 ns fail 40 7 4 ms TE beech 8 6 ms ifall 41 7 4 ms ONCE 8 5 ms 4 43 DVM ACCURACY TEST 53344 only DC Voltage Standard 4 0000V 42 8 mV C 8 mV 43 3 990V NOS 4 010V 44 3 990V EN 4 010V a 45 39 90V P ee 40 10V l 46 89 90V NINE CERIS 40 10V 4T 399 6V P a 400 4V 3 48 399 6V BR ees 400 4V K 4 44 CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE 4 AND SENSITIVITY TEST 5334A E 13 5 dBm 90 MHz 49 89999998 90000002 mN 13 5 dBm 200 MH
41. Std 488 1978 programmable instrument capable of the following basic measurements Frequency Period Time Interval Time Interval Delay Ratio Totalize Voltage Option 020 HP 5334A only Pulse Width Rise Fall Time Peak Voltage Levels HP 5334A B Operation and Programming x 3 7 In addition to the basic measurement functions three built in microprocessors provide convenience features such as e Math Functions offset and normalize give the user the capability of manipulating measurement data Refer to paragraph 3 116 Voltage Peaks and Trigger Levels of the A and B input signals are available by pressing a key on the front panel Refer paragraph 3 178 Nonvolatile Memory HP 5334A only gives the capability of storing and recalling up to 10 different front panel setups Refer to paragraph 3 102 3 126 and 3 130 3 8 Basic Circuits and Measurements 3 9 To maximize accuracy and resolution the HP 5334A B uses a reciprocal counting technique and analog interpolation Since the HP 5334A B is a reciprocal counter it always makes a period measurement of the input signal If a frequency measurement is desired the counter computes and displays the frequency by taking the reciprocal of the period measurement The period measurement characteristic of the HP 5334A B inherently produces high resolution at all frequencies over the entire 100 MHz bandwidth A basic block diagram of a reciprocal counter is shown in F
42. When a universal or selected device clear is received the HP 5334A B clears most errors if present except errors 5 0 through 5 2 clears all input buffers and resets the hardware for a new measurement The display LED s will flash momentarily Failure messages are not cleared DEVICE TRIGGER When a device trigger is received the HP 5334A B will start a new measurement CONTROLLER The HP 5334A B cannot be used as a controller Table 3 6 HP 5334A B Interface Capabilities HP IB DESCRIPTION Z SHT The instrument can generate messages AH1 The instrument can interpret received messages T5 The instrument can function as a talker In addition it can operate as a Talker Only instrument and can respond to serial poll It will unlisten if addressed as a talker TEO The instrument cannot function as an extended talker L4 The instrument can function as a listener in addition it will untalk itself if addressed as a listener LEO The instrument cannot function as an extended listener SRI The instrument can generate a service request i RLI The instrument can operate in both remote and local modes in addition it can respond to local lockout i PPO The instrument does not support paralle poli DC1 The instrument supports both the device clear DCL and selected device clear SDC commands DT1 The instrument can be remotely triggered CO The instrument cannot function as a controller 3 277 FRONT PANEL IN
43. X followed by another lt CR LF gt LINE 120 Return to LINE 30 and repeat the process LINE 130 End Program execution Running the program produces a printout similar to the following 3 97 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming EXAMPLE 8 ENTERING MATH CONSTANTS This program demonstrates one method of using Math constants to manipulate measurement data The program clears the HP 85 screen and asks for the offset value and the normalize value to be entered on the screen The entered values are sent to the counter with the math commands and the resultant measurement is then read and printed out by the HP 85 The process s then repeated LINE 100 LINE 110 LINE 120 LINE 130 LINE 140 LINE 150 LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 LINE 70 LINE 80 LINE 90 Print NORMALIZE followed by the value of N Execute lt CR LF gt Print RESULT followed by the contents of X Execute lt CR LF gt Return to LINE 20 and repeat the process End program execution Dimension X to 19 characters Clear the HP 85 screen Ask for the OFFSET VALUE Read the entered value into O Ask for the NORMALIZE VALUE Read the entered value into N Send IN MO O MN N commands to the 5334A B IN initializes the counter FREQ A mode MO O sets math offset to the value entered for O NAN N sets math normalize to the value entered
44. and range specified in Table 1 1 Sa 3 172 After the trigger level controls have been adjusted the dc voltages are programmed into memory by pressing STORE then the selected register number 0 9 Refer to paragraph 3 126 for a details on the operation of the STORE key Note the entire front panel setup will be stored in an addition to the sensitivity and trigger levels including the function i e READ LEVELS FREQ A etc ae 3 173 The store trigger levels and sensitivity levels are programmed into the instrument by pressing RECALL then the register number 0 9 The dc voltages for the INPUT A and B trigger levels and sensitivity levels will be set internally and the front panel will display dACS ON ifthe current status of the DACS is called up as described in paragraph 3 134 Refer to paragraph 3 130 for details on the operation of the RECALL key Note that the entire front panel setup will be recalled in addition to the sensitivity and trigger levels including the function i e READ LEVELS E FREQ A etc The front panel TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls will be disabled 3 174 RETURNING 5334A TRIGGER SENS LEVEL CONTROL TO FRONT PANEL dACS OFF To E return to front panel operation of the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls the Internal Control DACS must be disabled internal Control is turned OFF by pressing RECALL pressing CHS EEX i once or twice to display dACS OFF then pressing STORE The counter will retu
45. aya 4 aoa 3 143 PULSE WIDTH A Key iae s dpa eree nia takue entao asme 3 145 FREQ B Key oeste deca Re PR deut aed DEES CMM CE m 00 PERF UN 3 150 RISE FALL TIME A Key cuecoeseosok sao cR aA ER RHESI RE 3 152 EREE Key doses oud Ifageatue n eue E acid e 3 154 TL A B DELAY Key Mert 3 156 TOT START A Key eeeeeeee hh Hh hh 3 158 TOT STOP A Key essehhhh hh htt 3 160 DVM Key Option 020 jor HP 5334A only ceseii e sts aes 3 162 INPUT Group sleeeeeee hehehe 3 164 TRIGGER Light 542 so duode d r3 WaR DER a Vae Ia 3 166 TRIGGER LEVEL SENS Control ccc ccc reece nnn S168 2SENS chro 3JD8 READ LEVELS KEV praeina A E 3 180 SLOPE START ARM STOP ARM Keys es n B 3 182 AC KEY oie eG eS ese ey TRES Peace ee NE ddr aad 3 184 X10 ATTN Key 2 valued Er ERR REA CES EN C1 Ie nra ba ais d 3 186 50 Ohm X Key Seda ote tome kk brbehid es RE Eee E Tp De eh 3 188 108 kHz FILTER A Key cirea eve exa EX ERR iene EI RR 3 190 COM A Key Lis ERE exG uer UE ES RR eit ob quenquam cf De d 2400 AUTO 1RIG ERNST 3 195 EXT ARM SELECT Key een nnn P 3 200 INPUTA B x crete ue eben because EAA ETENEE teens qo 4 ox a xc X oes P HP 5334A B Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Section Title Page HH OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING Continued 3 202 ARNMGINPUT LL uci aqu used da e V cz RAE eae Rd E OEN 3 36 3 204 INPUT C IO pIOD 030 2e sacos cade ver Ka R
46. contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has been checked mechanically and electrically If the contents are incomplete or if there is mechanical damage or defect notify the nearest carrier as well as the Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office offices are listed at the back of this manual Keep the shipping materials for carrier s inspection The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for claim settlement N 2 5 PREPARATION FOR USE 2 6 Operating Environment 2 7 TEMPERATURE The instrument may be operated in temperatures from 0 C to 50 C 2 8 HUMIDITY The instrument may be operated in environments with humidity up to 9096 RH at 35 C However it should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation in the instrument Option 020 DVM of the HP 5334A may be operated in environments with humidity up to 8096 2 9 ALTITUDE The instrument may be operated at altitudes up to 4 600 metres 15 000 feet 2 10 Power Requirements 2 11 The HP 5334A B requires a power source of 100 or 115 120 volt ac 5 10 47 5 to 440 Hz single phase 220 or 230 240 volt ac 5 10 at 47 5 to 66 Hz single phase Power consumption for the instrument is less than 50 volt amperes 2 12 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection BEFORE CONNECTING THIS INSTRUMENT TO THE AC MAINS ITS PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED THROUGH THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS OF THE AC CABLE
47. dB 90 MHz to 200 MHz 15 mV rms to 1V rms 36 5 dB 200 MHz to 1000 MHz 78 mV rms to 1V rms 22 5 dB 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz HP 5334B 15 mV rms to 5V rms 150 5 dB 90 MHz to 1000 MHz 75 mV rms to 5V rms 36 5 dB 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz Signal Operating Range HP 53344 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc HP 5334B 50 Vdc to 50 Vdc Trigger Level Fixed at OV NOMINAL impedance ac coupled 50 NOMINAL Damage Level HP 5334A 8V dc peak ac fuse protected Fuse located in BNC connector HP 5334B 50 Vde 5 Vrms Frequency C Range 90 MHz to 1300 MHz LSD D Resolution and Accuracy are the same as Frequency A Probe Power HP 5334A only Compatible with HP 10855A Preamp OPTION 050 HP 5334A only Both DC Voltmeter Option 020 and 1300 MHz C Channel Option 030 Specifications are the same as for options ordered separately OPTION 060 Rear inputs Channe A and B and Arm inputs are rear terminals in parallei with front inputs Option 020 HP 5334A only 030 and 050 HP 5334A only inputs are at the rear panei only Channel A and B separate input capacitance is increased by 50 pF Arm input capacitance is increased by 45 pF Channel A and B input sensitivity is decreased to 50 mV rms from 20 MHz to 100 MHz imeasured at rear panel with front panel termi nated in 500 or front panel with rear panel terminated n 500 OPTION 700 HP 53348 only internal CHIL Interface Measurement Functions Provided Frequ
48. display will reflect the entry i e Addr 07 3 285 The examples used in this section assume an address setting of 03 This number is important when using a controller such as an HP 9826A HP 9836A HP 9845A or HP 85 calculator since the calculator addresses the HP 5334A B to talk or listen by using code 703 the 03 being the HP 5334A B address The ASCII characters for this same addresssetting are C for atalk address and for a listen address These characters are used when the controller is an HP 9830A calculator HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 72 Table 3 7 Address Selection ASCH CODE CHARACTER LISTEN TALK ADDRESS USAGE MODE SELECTED ADDRESS 4E SP ADDRESSABLE 01 A ADDRESSABLE 02 i B ADDRESSABLE 03 C ADDRESSABLE 04 D ADDRESSABLE 05 96 E ADDRESSABLE 06 amp F ADDRESSABLE 07 G ADDRESSABLE 08 H ADDRESSABLE 09 i ADDRESSABLE 10 J ADDRESSABLE 11 ay K ADDRESSABLE 12 L ADDRESSABLE 13 x M ADDRESSABLE 14 N ADDRESSABLE 15 O ADDRESSABLE 16 g P ADDRESSABLE 17 1 Q ADDRESSABLE 18 2 R ADDRESSABLE 19 3 S ADDRESSABLE 20 4 T ADDRESSABLE 21 5 U ADDRESSABLE 22 6 V ADDRESSABLE 23 7 W ADDRESSABLE 24 8 x ADDRESSABLE 25 9 Y ADDRESSABLE 26 Z ADDRESSABLE 27 f ADDRESSABLE 28 lt N ADDRESSABLE 29 ADDRESSABLE 30 gt a ADDRESSABLE TALK ONLY 3 286 INTERFACE COMMANDS 3 287 The commands the counter recognizes can be separated into two cl
49. displayed in decimai form 2 27 HP IB Descriptions 2 28 A description is provided in Section Ill of this manual A study of this information is necessary if the user is not familiar with the HP IB concept Additional information concerning the design criteria and operation of the bus is available in IEEE Standard 488 1978 titled Standard Digital Interface for Programming Instrumentation 32 29 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT 3 30 Environment 2 31 The instrument may be stored or shipped in environments within the following limits TEMPERATURE eeeen ntt 40 C to 75 C HUMIDITY asxersensepumm eren Fas up to 9076 RH at 60 C ALTITUDE eisxtxasesex reed enn n 7 620 metres 25 000 feet 2 32 The instrument should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation within the instrument 2 33 Packaging 2 34 ORIGINAL PACKAGING Containers and materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through Hewlett Packard for servicing attach a tag indicating thetype of service required return address model number and full serial number Also mark the container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number 2 35 OTHER PACKAGING The following general instructions should be used for repacking with commercially available materials 3 a Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic 4f shipping to Hewlett Packard office or service c
50. enable counting positive or negative pulse trains respectively as indicated in Figure 3 10 __ TRIGGER HYSTERESIS LEVEL WINDOW OV GROUND TRIGGER HYSTERESIS LEVEL WINDOW a b c Figure 3 10 Trigger Level Control Shifts Hysteresis Window NOTE The signal a will not be counted Using the trigger level control to shift the hysteresis levels above ground b or below ground c enables a count HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 29 The HP 5334A B is provided with a Continuously adjustable trigger level controls b Selectable AUTO TRIGGER c Front panel programmable trigger levels for HP 5334A only set via the internal trigger level controls DACS 3 30 ADIUSTABLE TRIGGER LEVEL CONTROLS The trigger levels are adjustable over the entire dynamic range of the counter when both AUTO TRIGGER and DACS are off This arrangement ensures that any signal of sufficient amplitude and within the dynamic range can be counted The triggering range of the input signal is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER light Optimum trigger point is usually determined by positioning the trigger level control within the triggering range If you are operating an HP 5334A then refer to paragraphs 3 170 through 3 177 for information regarding the DACS 3 31 SELECTABLE AUTO TRIGGER When AUTO TRIGGER is selected the trigger levels are controlled by the amplitude of the input signal and automatically set in accorda
51. for N Read the response into X Print OFFSET followed by the value of O Running the program will produce a printout similar to the following tad ikii ETE EXAMPLE 9 CALCULATING SLEW RATE MEASUREMENTS HP 5334A B8 Operation and Programming This program is an example of how 5334BA B can be used to make Slew Rate measurements The program makes a Rise Time measurement followed by a Channel A Peak Voltage levels measurement and uses the data to calculate the Slew Rate of the leading edge of the input signal Then the Rise Time Peak to Peak LINE 100 LINE 110 LINE 120 LINE 130 LINE 140 LINE 150 LINE 90 LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 LINE 70 LINE 80 Voltage and Slew Rate are displayed and the process is repeated For this example the positive slope of the signal is measured but the program can be modified to measure the negative slope Fall Time Dimension string variable T to 19 characters Send IN command to 5334A B IN initializes the counter places counter into known state Execute lt CR LF gt and send FN11 com mand to enable Rise Time mode Read rise time measurement into T Send FN14 command to enable Chan nel A Peak Voltage mode Read upper peak level into H and lower peak level into L Calculate the p p voltage P by sub tracting the lower peak value L from the u
52. in a test of the Multiple Register Counter MRC Procedure 1 Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel A Input 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B COMA AOE E tli da Po dot aa wd aie ena ON AUTOTRIU asuda d e pe pita ide deser ttes eeu OFF TRIGGER LEVEL controls 1 5 eoo midpoint setting CHAN A and B SUD 55 orsa epar ied o aere d adds ON GATE TINIE Ida todos au DEI b LE e NOU hewn es 1 Second PUNGTION cuneata vea oet E a BRE RE abes RATIO A B Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 1 000 000 0 000 000 2 and both trigger lights are flashing Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 3 What Checked 1 The operation of the MRC is checked using the ratio function 2 The 10 MHz oscillator signal at the rear panel BNC connector is verified For Failure Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The Measurement Block contains the MRC Multiple Register Counter and other blocks involved are the Input Amplifier BRECON Front Panel and Time Base Power Supply blocks 4 19 FREQUENCY Description Using this test a frequency is measured which will exercise the interpolators Procedure 1 Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel A Input 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 10 000 000 0 MHz 0 2 Hz Test Record Mark P
53. in question The second is a compiete test of the instrument s electrical performance using the specifications of Table 1 1 as the performance standards And third is an HP IB verification test using the HP 85A computer as a controller All tests can be performed without access to the interior of the instrument 4 3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 4 Equipment required for the performance tests is listed in Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the table may be substituted for the recommended modelis 4 5 OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD 4 6 Results of the operation verification tests may be recorded on a copy of the Operational Verification Test Record which follows the verification tests Table 4 1 Theresults of the complete performance tests may be recorded on a copy of the Performance Test Record which follows the performance tests Table 4 2 4 7 CALIBRATION CYCLE 4 8 To maintain the HP 5334A B in optimum operating condition depending on the use and environmental conditions it is suggested that the instrument be checked using the performance _ tests at least once each year The Counter s reference oscillator must be checked and adjusted if necessary to a house frequency standard before beginning the performance tests Refer to Adjustment Procedure 5 15 in Section V of the Service Manual Follow the preliminary instructions given in the INTRODUCTION
54. is compatible with the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 1B Remote programming is installed as standard equipment and allows the instrument to respond to remote control instructions and output measurement data via the HP IB At the simplest level the HP 5334A B can output data in the talk only mode to other devices such asa controller or printer In more sophisticated systems a computing or other type of controller can remotely program the HP 5334A B to perform a specific type of measurement trigger the measurement and collect the results NOTE HP 1B is Hewlett Packard s implementation of IEEE Std 488 1978 Standard Digital Interface for Programming Instrumentation and ANSI Standard MC 1 1 3 262 To remotely program the counter efficiently the operator must be familiar with the selected controller the configured interface and the local operation and functional capabilities of the HP 5334A B Typical controllers for the HP IB are the HP 9825A B HP 9835A HP 9816A HP9845A HP 9000 series 200 and 300 HP 1000 or HP 85A B The following HP manuals should provide useful background information Hewlett Packard 85 Owner s Manual and Programming Guide Hewlett Packard 9825A Operating and Programming Reference Manual Hewlett Packard 9825A I O Control Reference Manual Hewlett Packard 9825B Manual Kit Hewlett Packard 9826A BASIC Manual Hewlett Packard 9835A B Operating and Programming Manual Hewlett Packard 9845A Operating and Program
55. is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed Refer to Section Il Instailation SAFETY EARTH GROUND An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminais or supplied power cable SAFETY SYMBOLS Instruction manual symbol the The WARNING sign denotes a product will be marked with this WARNING hazard t calls attention to a symbol when it is necessary for the procedure practice or the like user to refer to the instruction which if not correctly performed or adhered to manuali could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated con h indicates hazardous voitages ditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a to chassis when such connection 7 T Indicates terminal is connected CAUTION kazara dbcals attenti n to an operating procedure practice or Is not apparent the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could resuit in damage to or destruc TN Alternating current tion of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated con a ic Direct current ditions are fully understood and met SAFETY INFORMATION WARNING Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or discon necting the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could re
56. most measurements 3 204 INPUT C Option 030 3 205 The INPUT C module as shown in Figure 3 37 contains the C Channel input BNC SENSITIVITY control HP 5334A only and PREAMP POWER jack HP 5334A only The input connector is a special fused BNC HP 5334A only refer to paragraph 3 235 for fuse replacement instructions The SENSITIVITY control varies the C Channel input sensitivity refer to specifications Table 1 1 The 5334A s C Channel PREAMP POWER jack allows the use of an optional high frequency broadband preamplifier such as the HP 10855A Since the 5334B s C Channel does not provide a PREAMP POWER jack an HP 1122A Probe Power Su pply may be used The HP 1122A has the capability to drive up to four HP 10855As The GATE TIME control operates in channel C as it does with channel A or B NOTE The PREAMP POWER jack supplies 15V dc and a ground output This connector will not support a three wire type power probe HP 5334A HP 53348 INPUT C INPUT C LM MAX SENSITIVITY PREAMP POWER Figure 3 37 HP 5334A and HP 5334B C Channels cu Hi zotuv dY ot acce Ped i Rud j HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 206 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AND ANNUNCIATORS 9 DISPLAY The 5334A B contains anine digit red LED display with a floating decimal point Each LED has seven segments Most measurements are displayed in engineering notation with an exponent range of t9 EXPONENT SIGN The EXP
57. panel operation INTRODUCTORY OPERATING GUIDE FOR THE HP 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER WITH SERIES 200 COMPUTERS AND BASIC Provides a good tutorial for learning t write programs for HP 5334A remote operation QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE FOR THE HP 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER Provides a reference guide for HP 53344 remote operation using HP IB TUTORIAL DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS Provides bacKground and all the basics for understanding the Hewlett Packard implementation of IEEE Std 488 1978 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS Provides a good summary of HP IB operation asd xus J amp uil HP 5 PREFACE This manual is designed to present the information required by the user to effectively operate and program the HP 5334A B Universal Counter it is divided into sections each relating to a specific topic As much as possible the sections are self contained It is the intention of this manual to allow for quick location of desired information while still providing the overall depth of detail required Some sections provide the learning and working information and will be used frequently Other sections are dedicated to general and 334A B Preface introductory types of information and are intended to be used only for reference Where applicable photos illustrations and diagrams foldout have been placed throughout the manual In limiting the depth of coverage in this manual a certa
58. parameter ON 1 or OFF 0 Numeric commands GA require a numeric entry that sets the gate time to a specified value 3 319 MATH MEMORY GROUP Commands in the math memory group are equivalent to pressing a key or a sequence of keys on the HP 5334 A B front panel in the local mode of operation The MD command equivalent to a single key stroke is a binary command that sets the corresponding parameter ON 1 or OFF 0 Numeric commands MN and MO require a numeric entry that sets the corresponding math operation to aspecific value Integer commands MR and MS are equivalent to the local STORE and RECALL key sequences The MR and MS commands are not valid for the HP 5334B 3 320 Miscellaneous and Special Functions 3 321 HS1 High Speed Output Mode On high speed mode sends the HP 5334A B measurement data to the counter in binary form The data is sent in 8 bytes terminated by an EOI with the last byte In this mode the counter is capable of sending measurement data at the rate of 150 measurements per second When the HS1 command is sent it places the HP 5334A B in the high speed output mode The counter displays the message FASt dAtA while high speed measurements are being taken The high speed output format is discussed in detail in paragraph 3 344 3 322 HS0 High Speed Output Mode Off the HSO command takes the counter out of the high speed output mode allows it to function in the normal remote state 3 323 ID De
59. pass filter configuration into INPUT A attenuating frequencies above 100 kHz by greater than 3 dB When the 100 kHz FILTER is enabled the key indicator is ON When the filter is turned OFF the counter then resumes normal operation over the entire 100 MHz bandwidth FILTER A is disallowed in the RISE FALL TIME mode 3 190 COM A Key 3 191 The COM A key selects Separate or Common input amplifier control In the COM A position indicated when the key LED is ON the signal at INPUT A is also applied to INPUT B INPUT B connector is disconnected from the input circuitry and coupling and impedance selection is controlled by channel A In the Separate position indicated when the key LED is OFF the A and B inputs and controls operate independently of each other COM A is automatically set and cannot be disabled when the HP 5334A B is operating in the RISE FALL TIME mode 3 192 AUTO TRIG Key 3 193 The AUTO TRIG key selects the Automatic Triggering mode of operation When AUTO TRIGGER is selected key LED on the trigger level is controlled by the input signal and is automatically set according to the measurement application Attenuation is automatic when AUTO TRIG is selected the X10 attenuator is enabled when the signal exceeds the dynamicrange or the signal operating range when the signal is within both limits X1 attenuation is enabled Attenuation and trigger levels cannot be controlled manually when AUTO TRIG is ON 3 194 AUTO TRIG
60. sequence of bytes representing a decimal number and a terminator For integer commands the range depends on the specific command The number is accepted in free di format and converted to an integer An error is generated if the number is negative out of range or if there is no number Equivalent integer command examples OUTPUT 703 XA2 E OUTPUT 703 XA2 89 OUTPUT 703 XA0 2E 1 Es F d TERSE commands Type T a sequence of two ASCII coded bytes with no numeric character following them These commands are executed immediately after the second character is received and do not require a terminator For example the characters IN will cause the counter to INitialize all control settings to the default status SPECIAL commands Type I O a sequence of two ASCII coded bytes that may or may not 2 be followed by a sequence of bytes representing a defined value For example SMn T will set the Service Request Mask to number representing the sum of the bits you want enabled the counter will respond to ID by sending the string HP 5334A B followed i by CR LF 3 310 NUMERIC ENTRY 7 3 311 Numeric entry follows the code and format guidelines of the IEEE 728 standard for type NR3 numbers It applies to the numeric portion of any command that requires the entry of a 3 number This is a free format input with spaces allowed before a numeric character is entered however spaces following a nume
61. settings will stop the gating and update of the Counter Trigger light stops flashing 5 Set AUTO TRIG to ON Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to Input B Set FUNCTION to FREQ B Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 10 000 000 0 MHz X 0 2 Hz and Channel A and B trigger lights are flashing 6 Rotate Channel B trigger level control Observe There is no effect on the Counter s operation 7 Set AUTO TRIG to OFF Rotate Channel B trigger level control Observe Extreme clockwise and counterclockwise control settings will stop the gating and update of the Counter Trigger light stops flashing Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 7 What Checked Control lines and DAC circuitry For Failures Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The test involves all of the functional blocks the input Amplifier DAC Measurement Executive Front Panel and Time Base Power Supply blocks 4 9 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 23 CMOS RAM HP 5334A Only Description The CMOS RAM device and support circuitry are checked in a limited way Procedure 1 Reinitialize the HP 5334A 2 Store a different front panel setup by first selecting the configuration then pressing the STORE key and finally 1 Switch the HP 5334A B to STANDBY and then ON Press the RECALL key and then 1 Observe The front panel setup is exactly as stored in location 1 3 Repea
62. the Service Manual as a first step in correcting the problem 4 40 TIME INTERVAL TO B DELAY TEST Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for T I A to B Delay specification Description Operation of the time interval delay circuitry is verified by introducing a delay into a frequency measurement 1 i 4 27 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 53S4A B 3325A UNIVERSAL FUNCTION GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 4 11 Time Interval A to B Delay Test Setup Equipment Function Generator mE HP 3325A Procedure 1 Set the function generator as follows FrequenCy ee sesdiopN d Pu UE EA eB NE be teres 100 Hz ADIGE ees Voodoo ter EN LE MEE 200 mV p p FUNCOM si veis LR LA ETARAWAT NERA EAS ERAS Square Wave 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the HP 5334A B FUNCTION S Leisexu suae s uhr adea T l A B DELAY GATE TIME DELAY iane ke qi t Pon CRUS i S PER brates 9 ms SENS Pastas opo do beet Eus S ros bus mo ria Ps ON A amp TRIG SENS control iicet a Scie rx ees fully cw COMA CLE ON CHAN A amp B 509 wor one AOS ON CHAN B Negative SLOPE ON falling edge 3 Connect the function generator output to the HP 5334A B Input A 4 Press SINGLE CYCLE on the HP 5334A B VERIFY The Counter displays 15 ms 100 us 5 Record the Time Interval Delay measurement on the Performance Test Record line 36 Failure if the instrument under test does not meet the test specification
63. the controller This mode is especially useful when used with the service request The instrument will make a measurement then alert the controller that data is ready by asserting SRQ when the measurement is completed This frees the controller to perform other functions while the measurement is being processed and ensures that the controller will know when the measurement is available 3 332 WAQ Wait To Be Addressed Mode Off WAO takes the instrument out of the wait to be addressed mode and allows it to function in the normal remote state In the normal state measurements are made continuously whether or not they are read by the controller HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 12 HP 5334A B Programming Command Set COMMAND EQUIVALENT GROUP KEY CONTROL MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION INPUT AC AAO Set Input A Coupling to DC AAT Set Input A Coupling to AC SLOPE ASO Set Input A Slope to positive Sd AST Set Input A Slope to negative TRIGGER AT lt num gt Set Channel A Trigger Level lt value gt LEVEL SENS AUTO TRIG AUO Set AUTO TRIG Off AUT Set AUTO TRIG On X10 ATTN AXO Set Input A Attenuation to X1 AX1 Set input A Attenuation to X10 500 Z AZO Set Input A Impedance to 1M ohm AZ Set input A impedance to 50 ohm AC BAO Set Input B Coupling to DC BA1 i Set Input B Coupling to AC SLOPE BSQ Set input B Slope to positive i BS1 Set Input B Slope to negative TRIGGER BT lt num gt Set Channel B Trigger Level value LEV
64. the instrument model number then the momentary display of the instrument s decimal HP 1B address e g Addr 03 The ARM and GATE lights will toggle back and forth followed by the momentary display of the PASS message when all tests have successfully completed as shown in Figure 3 42 Figure 3 42 Self Check PASS Display Ser Ico REI met PT lus i HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 244 After the power up sequence the counter will initialize itself All gate math memory and input signal conditioning keys will be OFF the function will be FREQ A with AUTO TRIG and auto attenuation ON and the gate time setting at 300 milliseconds math offset value will be set at 0 and normalize at 1 internal trigger levels controls will beset at 0 volts and dACS will be OFF 3 245 Any failures during the power up cycle will produce a display of a numbered error or fail message Fail messages generally indicate a hardware failure within the HP 5334A B and error messages indicate the user has attempted a disallowed operation or key sequence If a fail message is displayed press the RESET key to clear the display and return the counter to the next test in the power up sequence Refer to Error Indications paragraph 3 252 and Tables 3 3 and 3 4 3 246 Diagnostic Sequence 3 247 The Diagnostic Sequence is a continuous cycle which will repeat until manually reset During the Diagnostic Sequence an internal check is ma
65. to 99 999 seconds in millisecond increments HP 5334A B Operation and Programming START STOP DESIRED T 1 MEASUREMENT ACTUAL T I M RSUREMENT cn H STANDARD T 1 A B8 START STOP HI DESIRED T 1 MEASUREMENT Pet ACTUAL T I MEASUREMENT al eaterman HOL BORE r f if I T i DELAY figure 3 14 Time interval Delay Measurement 3 71 Ratio Measurements 3 72 See Figure 3 52 for details of Ratio measurements The Ratio mode of operation provides measurement of the ratio between two frequencies The HP 5334A B measures and displays the frequency ratio of signals on INPUT A in relation to signals on INPUT B Both input channels have 35 mV rms sensitivity up to 100 MHz For ratio displays greater than 1 the higher frequency is connected to Channel A Although the HP 5334A B can measure and display ratios of less than 1 it is recommended that the higher frequency be connected to INPUT A gt 3 73 Frequency ratio measurements are made by connecting signals to input channels A and B pressing the RATIO A B function key and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning The GATE TIME control determines the resolution by selecting the number of cycles of the INPUT B signal over which the ratio is measured Increasing the gate time or increasing the signal frequency at INPUT A results in greater resolution of the measure
66. va Ratio A B Measurements To Tr PEE Totalize Measurements cesi aue ERR EVERRAAELUCRI Ra E A i is Pulse Width Measurements 354 ees rop RR RIEN E REIR E Fg Rise Fall Time Measurements 2 0 cece eee cere nnn DVM Voltage Measurements for 5334A Only s eee eee Trigger Level Measurements cece cece cece enn Channel A Peak Voltage Measurements PETENTE Channel B Peak Voltage Measurements eese Gate Time Delay Setting iis er cua wesc dente Seu ves ETE Ops HP 5334A B Address Entry Display s esee Time Base Reference Setup es eee ehh hh hann Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 10 Hz 20 MHz Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 10 Hz 20 MHz Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 80 MHz 100 MHz Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 80 MHz 100 MHz Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060 Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060 Period A Test Setup 2 iow Le RA be EE SUIS VOR EREEIS UA T EM de Pulse Width A Test Setup iicvecco ks E yu RR QR EI E hn Time Interval A to B Test Setup eoru eae ua eI Wie Paw Time interval A to B Delay Test Setup 0 00 406s enm Ratio A B Test Setup oia eed SP tn ra be E OEUVRE QE UP ot Rise Fall Time A Test Setup morer DVM Accuracy Test Setup cess re e rk yr nas Spied ad HP 5334A Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup HP 53348 Channel C Fre
67. 0 7250 7250 7270 7280 7296 7300 7310 7329 7330 7340 7350 7350 7370 73280 7380 7400 7416 7420 7430 7440 7450 7450 7470 7480 7480 7500 75160 7520 75350 7540 7550 7560 7570 7588 4 62 7580 76900 7618 7620 78530 7540 7650 75856 7570 7589 Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued PAUSE CLEAR DISP Disconnect the BNC cable DISP l l DISP BS PAUSE OUTPUT A 3 HS IN GOTO 7850 END OF PROGRAM CLEAR DISP HS DISP DISP CHECKPOINT RESULTS DISP FOR HP IB ADDRESS A DISP DISP H IF C 2 THEN DISP 6 GOTO 7380 DISP DISP F PAUSE CLEAR FOR I TO 14 IF RCIOs0 THEN R NOT PERFORMED IF R IOS THEN R amp FAIL IF RCIOS2 THEN R e PASS zi uns DISP CHECKPOINT I1 R GOTO 7460 a HEN DISP tapa ex n Fe 1i R GOTO 7460 NEXT I IF CeZ2 THEN DISP USING 5 GOTO 765590 DISP USING K 3 FS PAUSE CLEAR dd Would you like a printed versionof the checkpoint results x Yes Press Ki to receive a printed version DISP No Press K4 to proceed ON KEY 1 YES GOTO 7610 OFF KEY 3 ON KEY 4 NO GOTO 7670 KEY LABEL GOTO 7509 CLEAR CRT IS 2 Gee GOTO 7270 CRT IS C LOCAL 7 ABORTIO 7 7690 7700 7710 7720 7730 TYUOAQ 7750 7780 7770 7789 7780 7 00 7B10 7820 7630 i Sarat 7850 7850 i 7870 TEBO 7890 78800 7810 7920 7830 7840 7950 7860 7970 7980 7992 EG
68. 0 Oven Oscillator Control HP 5334A Only 3 230 A hole is provided on the rear panel of the HP 5334A to allow external fine adjustment of the Option 010 Oven Oscillator 10811 as shown in Figure 3 40 3 231 Address Switch HP 5334B Only 3 232 The HP 5334B is equipped with an HP IB Address switch located in the rear panel as shown in Figure 3 40 The instrument s HP IB address is set to 03 at the factory but can beset by the user to addresses 00 to 30 Refer to paragraph 3 284 for further details on HP 1B address setting of the 5334B 3 233 OPERATOR S MAINTENANCE 3 234 The only maintenance the operator should normally perform is replacement of the primary power fuse when necessary located within the AC Power Module For instructions on how to change the fuse refer to Section Il Line Voltage and Fuse Selection CAUTION 3 For continued protection from fire hazards be sure that only slow blow type fuses with the required current and voltage ratings are used for replacement Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse hoiders e EUR HE HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 235 Replacing C Channel Fuse HP 5334A only 3 236 When Option 030 C Channel is installed the operator may be required to replace the C Channel input BNC fuse This is a 1 8A fuse HP Part Number 2110 0301 which is located within the INPUT C BNC connector see Figure 3 41 for details To repl
69. 1 STORE or RECALL key is ON the counter is in a data entry mode indicated by the flashing ENTRY lightinthe display The MATH SELECT ENTER key has two data entry modes the first permits an offset value to be entered the second allows entry of a normalize value SELECT ENTER key activates an operational stack similar to that of the READ LEVELS key Pressing the key a third time exits the MATH SELECT entry mode and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation When not in the data entry mode the DISABLE function toggles between ON and OFF with each press ofthe key 3 19 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 20 HP 5334A HP 53348 MA TH MEMORY MATH e e STORE O 8 DISABLE RECALL DISABLE 0 8 Figure 3 21 MATH MEMORY Group 3 117 SELECT ENTER Key 3 118 The math SELECT ENTER key allows the user to perform a number of mathematical operations on the measurement before it is displayed OFFSET OFS and NORMALIZE NML allows for the addition or subtraction and division or multiplication respectively of the measurement by user specified constants Modification of the display by the math operations is represented by the following relationship Measurement NORMALIZE OFFSET Display 3 119 The OFFSET operation is performed after normalization Any single or combination of these operations can be selected This provides the user extensive control over the resultant display It can be used fo
70. 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Period A specifications Description The minimum specified period measurement of 10 ns is verified using a 100 MHz input signal 53344 B 8660A C UNIVERSAL sad FEEDTHROUGH SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 4 8 Period A Test Setup Equipment Signal Generator ieiieiisas ete rona HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency cece cece seen sees eee neseeneteaees 100 MHz Amplitude 2 eese era hanh hh ren 50 mV rms NOTE OPTION 060 If the HP 5334A 8 has Option 060 rear panel inputs terminate the unused Channel A input front or rear with a50 Ohm load 4 24 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION Su Geta ect Rea Ka Gagne be alae huis PERIOD A GATE TIME 25i cutie cc d a eod abel aita fud 1 Second SENS P esses ON CHAN A TRIG SENS control c dee tase hh Ee fully cw 3 Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A B Input A using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 8 NOTE Do not use a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector at the Input for Counters with Option 060 VERIFY The Counter displays 10 ns 000 000 1 ns 4 Record the Period A measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 33 Failure If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification consider performing the adjustments in Section V of the Ser
71. 5334A HP IB ADDRESS To set the address press the instrument front panel keys in the order shown Press RECALL key The 5334A will display SEL r__ the ENTRY light will flash MATH MEMORY group and the RECALL key indicator will ms Referto did 3 130 for further details on the RECALL key Press decimal point key The current address will be displayed e g Addr 03 shown in FUNCTION DATA group Figure 3 61 Enter decimal address Press appropriate digits e g to select Address 05 press 5J FUNCTION DATA group The display will reflect the entry i e Addr 05 Press STORE key The address will be stored in memory and the 5334A will return MATH MEMORY group to the previous mode of operation Figure 3 61 HP 5334A B Address Entry Display 3 283 After selecting the HP 5334A address be sure to press the front panel STORE key The address setting will then be read by the microprocessor and stored in memory This action is required whenever the address setting is changed 3 284 SETTING THE HP 53348 HP 1B ADDRESS The address must be selected from the HP 5334B HP 1B8 Address switch located on the rear panel in the extreme lower right corner To set the address e g to 07 press switches A1 through A3 in their 1 up position and leave switches A4 and A5 in their 0 down position To verify that the address did change to 07 reinitialize the 5334B by switching the instrument to STANDBY and then to ON The
72. 58 Channel A Peak Voltage Measurements 3 64 E E LE Puer ara MATH DISABLE ON AUTO TRIG ON HP 5334A B Operation and Programming HEWLETT PACKARD WEE 53344 UNIVERSAL COUNTER i TRIE LS TC ax Bs Stan ume OA O G OG 4s 864 uf a id oe oim a oar AVERAGE s H ji E S amp 9 it S BB n e NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF Connect signal to INPUT B jack Press FREQ B function key Press AC DC 500 Z 1MQ and SLOPE B key to appropriate positions Adjust GATE TIME setting if required Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to frequency measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 7 Press READ LEVELS key three times Upper and lower peak levels will be displayed PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS c M Lockout conditions during PEAK Preset conditions on initial selection o PEAK LEVELS LEVELS mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT di ELENG HP IB COMMAND Sene HP IB COMMAND e s m Dom oe w SINGLE CYCLE OFF
73. 8 front panel displays the generated frequency Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 11 HP 5334A B Performance Tests What Checked Basic operation of the Channel C option For Failures Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The Channel C Measurement Executive and Front Panel blocks are involved here Table 4 1 HP 5334A B Operation Verification Test Record Card Hewlett Packard Company Tested By Model 5334A B Universal Counter Serial Number PARAGRAPH TEST RESULTS NUMBER PASS FAIL 4 16 POWER UP SELF TEST DIAGNOSTIC MODE a 4 17 READ LEVELS e 4 18 RATIO A B Macc 4 19 FREQUENCY or 4 20 INPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONING CHECK C 4 21 TL A B EcL xii 4 22 AUTO TRIGGER RS 4 23 CMOS RAM Mmm 4 24 DVM Options 020 and 050 HP 5334A only J ee 4 25 CHANNEL C Options 030 and 050 HP 5334A EC REM 4 26 CHANNEL C Option 030 HP 5334B Mor ee 4 12 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 27 PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 28 The following procedures test the electrical performance of the HP 5334A and 5334B Universal Counters using the specifications in Table 1 1 as the performance standards The tests included here are much more specific and rigorous than the operational verification procedures Use these procedures to ensure that the instrument in question is operating at its highest level at incoming QA the annual calibration cycle check or following any of th
74. A 3 30 EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Entry Mode Display Arming Off 3 32 EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Display arming States Selected 3 32 Arming Modes 25 wes deve weed tedtaas ds is Re Cere bene Mta ties 3 35 HP 5334A and HP 5334B C Channels lee vm 3 36 Front Panel Display and Annunciators 2 cece eee eer eee eens 3 37 Front Panel Features Controls Indicators and Connectors 3 39 Rear Panel Features Controls and Connectors ssesesreerrrrreres 3 40 Details of INPUT C BNC Connector and Fuse Mounting 5334A Only 3 43 Sel Check PASS Display s eoose tque UREAPEYTEEREPE MK VRAC VERI EE FOE En 3 44 Display C Heel a Acerin tn ui edis eid pute n beiden did 6 3 45 a dbi ee a hres ETE Figure 3 44 3 45 3 46 3 47 3 48 3 49 3 50 3 51 3 52 3 53 3 54 3 55 3 56 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 61 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 LIST OF FIGURES Continued Title FAIL Message Display sese Petite duco Rd Error Message Display sees hehe Frequency Measurements 2 cece cence reece eee nnne Frequency C Measurements eee e ccc geet nnn Period Measurements 2 5246 tub Fisk es eR ware va de ra d AN s Time Interval Measurements lessen ntn Time Interval Delay Measurements 0 0 cece eee eee eee ee eens Time Interval Averaging iioii ca e ior ER ORT EI A EATUR EAE
75. A B HP IB Interface Functions INTERFACE FUNCTION SUBSET IDENTIFIER INTERFACE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION SH1 Complete source handshake capability AHT Complete acceptor handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker serial poll has talk only mode will unaddress talk if addressed listen TEO No extended talker capability L4 Listener basic listener no listen only mode will unaddress listen if addressed to talk LEO No extended listener capability SR1 Full service request capability RL1 Complete remote local capability PPO No parallel poll capability DC1 Full device clear capability DT1 Full device trigger capability co No controller capability E2 Tri state Drivers standardized manner This is known as the capability label The label is located above the rear panel HP IB connector and lists the functions as follows SH1 AH1 T5 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO E2 3 275 The number following the interface function code in Table 3 5 indicates the particular capability of that function as listed in Appendix C of IEEE Standard 488 1978 and is described briefly in Table 3 6 HP 5334A B Interface Capabilities 3 276 Nearly all controls on the HP 5334A B can be programmed remotely and data from the measurements can be sent to other devices through the HP 1B The HP 5334A B operates as both a talker and a listener as listed in Table 3 7 The HP 5334A B output format is the same regardless of the mode talk only a
76. ATA INPUT and if installed and INPUT C Option 030 and DVM Option 020 HP 5334A only 3 101 With some exceptions each group operates fairly independently of the others The operation of each front panel key is discussed in detail in the following paragraphs 3 102 Operation of the individual keys is relatively straightforward The LED s Light Emitting Diodes in the center of most keys indicate the key status When the LED is on it indicates the key s labeled function is active or in effect When the LED is off it indicates the key s labeled function is disabled or inactive Many keys operate in this toggle on off fashion 3 103 Front Panel MEMORY applies to HP 5334A only 3 104 To avoid having to reenter math constants signal conditioning setups etc whenever switching between two or more functions repetitively the Front Panel MEMORY has ten storage registers This allows you to set up to 10 function modes each with its own front panelsetup The GATE TIME setting TRIGGER LEVEL setting and key setups for each of the keys in the GATE MATH MEMORY FUNCTION DATA and INPUT sections can be stored in memory and recalled Refer to paragraphs 3 126 and 3 130 for details 3 105 GATE Group Oda DATE TIME SINGLE 100 GATE CYCLE AVERAGE Figure 3 19 GATE Group 3 106 The GATE group keys toggle ON OFF each time a key is pressed 3 107 GATE TIME DELAY Key 3 108 GATE TIME DELAY control key displays the cur
77. ATEI IENAAT CMBR SEEMED SEN AA TERENE AAR EELS REREAD aeter im WELT SSSA QVI AEAEE E Nave PME MR tt rr AA BER PIN SEA I MIB UAM MAI E d re NP B RAS dta PLA PATERE ACHT EAE T 1A LESE I oM A La AY PT SEM A USEETROGEE EAE ERES ATENTO t ENEBEOIS S HP 5334A B D uq ay T Ia NIVERSAL COUNTERS J HP 5334A HP 5334B OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING General Information Operation and Programming Performance Tests installation PECAR TNMEN ENa S EBTNT LES EP ent aj TRIES UMS n arant EE I OE ray papi VAATA NAS AN a mre era rta ma m a AN PAYE A uk a A SR aa A AE nd PHA A Be EM a naan zs IMITARI NAND ned tme a rta MA ROV C2 ABI ENSEM SV ES AEN A DAIS AMOI Pied CEP VRAT TINTA n Co WOE aam neta AA dae I HTC EEE AL FETU A Ay HE Arf 8 VPEt S dH v ry pry rey pr pee t fh og jee y QERE ume tg Ue UR ER R IRE ics EL iR vas u muet OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL HP 5334A AND HP 5334B UNIVERSAL COUNTERS SERIAL NUMBER PREFIX 2510A HP 5334A 2704A HP 5334B S ma J This manual applies directly to HP 5334As with Serial Number Prefix 2510A and HP 5334Bs with Serial Prefix 2704A j The manual for an HP 5334A B with a serial number prefix higher than the ones listed above will include a Manual Changes supplement which will describe what changes if i any need to be made to the manual to make it match the instrument it accompanies For serial prefixes below the ones indicated in the abo
78. B ARMING and C for instruments with Opt 030 700 MATE Processor Board Block Assembly HP 5334B only 907 Front Handles 53348 only 5061 9688 908 Rack Mount 5061 9674 909 Front Handels and Rack Mount Kit 5334B only 5061 9675 910 Extra Manual One set of Operating Programming and Service Manuals 913 Rack Mount Kit for use with supplied Front Handles 5334A only 5061 9769 W30 Extended Hardware Support Adds two years of return to HP Hardware Service 1 23 The options installed at the factory are noted on the rear panel of the counter ERE dena 8 HP 5334A B General Information NOTE To retrofit Option 030 C Channel Input on HP 5334Bs contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed at the back of this manual 1 24 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT 1 25 Table 1 5 lists the test equipment required for testing adjusting and servicing the Universal Counter The Critical Specifications column describes the essential requirements for each piece of test equipment Other equipment can be substituted if it meets or exceeds these cr tical specifications Table 1 5 Recommended Test Equipment INSTRUMENT CRITICAL SPECIFICATIONS MOD T DC Standard Voltage 0 to 400 Volts FLUKE 343 A P Accuracy 0 0025 Frequency Standard Frequency 10 MHz HP 5061A or A Accuracy 1X10 10 HP 5065A Digital Multimeter Resolution 100 uV HP 3468A A T Range 100 mV to 100V Function Generator Frequency Range 20 MH
79. BLE ON AUTO TRIG OFF GATE TIME ENTRY 100 ms controlled by DVM TRIGGER SINGLE CYCLE OFF LEVELS 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in TRIG LEVEL READ MATH DISABLE ON LEVELS AUTO TRIG OFF GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in TRIG LEVEL n mo nm d em m m 14 nee 3 n id 4 due HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 2 Preset and Lockout Conditions Continued PRESET CONDITIONS LOCKOUT CONDITIONS PARAMETER SETTING SETTING A B PEAK SINGLE CYCLE OFF VOLTAGE 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in PEAK LEVEL READ MATH DISABLE ON LEVELS AUTO TRIG ON X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG SENS OFF DACS 5334A only OFF GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in PEAK LEVEL AUTO TRIG X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON OFF i ON SENS OFF none Note if SENS is turned ON AUTO TRIG is turned OFF DACS 5334A only OFF l none Note if DACS are turned ON AUTO TRIG is turned OFF TRIGGER set internally controls disabled LEVEL SENS COM A ON AC INPUT B coupling controlled by INPUT A ON DC OFF 500 Z INPUT B impedance controlled by INPUT A ON 1 MQ Z OFF SENS ON AUTO TRIG OFF none Note if AUTO TRIG is turned ON SENS is turned OFF DACS ON AUTO TRIG OFF AUO none 1 5334A Note if AUTO TRIG is turned ON DACS are turned OFF only TRIGGER set internally controls disabled LEVEL SENS 3 252 ERROR INDICATIONS 3 253 Under certain condit
80. CSI35 OS 35 ER 301 F L301 68 20 1 HL 35 DIM R L3801 S8 30 1 DIM 18L351 J8L101 K 1101 L L211 M C211 NBL IO 1 RCIA XCS 2 X8L 200 A Press CONT to perform test ES Press CONT when ready C Verify that S354A B front panel D Verify that S334A B display EG After pressing CONT FS8s Press CONT for next display ogz CHECKPOINT HS RAE HR R ERE EE KE EERE RRR EERE HEE ESE FOR I TO 14 R T NEXT I CRI 15 1 7A gd K Bod Perens Cb Ra Bey UU kd E E Euh Pss Ud med o E ur He a ET 2 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 520 C 530 ENABLE KBD i 32 E40 550 DISPLAY TITLE CHECKPOINT LIST AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 56 BEEP 570 CLEAR 580 DISP USING 5 580 DISP H 500 DISP 610 DISP 5334A B HP IB OPERATION 520 DISP VERIFICATION PROGRAM 530 DISP 640 DISP H 658 DISP 550 WAIT 2500 570 CLEAR 680 DISP USING 5 680 DISP H 700 DISP 710 DISP CHECKPOINT SUMMARY 720 DISP 730 DISP H 740 DISP 750 IF C 2 THEN 780 750 WAIT 2000 770 CLEAR 780 DISP 1 Power up Preset 780 DISP 2 Remote Local Local Lockout 800 DISP 3 Function Select 810 DISP 4 Input Conditioning Channel A 820 DISP 5 Input Conditioning Channel B B30 DISP B8 Trigger Levels 840 DISP 7 Gate Time 850 DISP 8 External Arming 8650 DISP 8 Math Functions 870 DISP 1 Memory Reca
81. Characteristics paragraph 3 4 How to Make Measurements paragraph 3 51 Initial Power Up Checks and Self Diagnostics paragraph 3 88 Front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors paragraph 3 92 Front Panel Display and Annunciators paragraph 3 206 Rear Panel Controls and Connectors paragraph 3 208 Operator s Maintenance paragraph 3 233 Operator s Checks paragraph 3 240 Quick procedures to verify the instrument is operating properly Preset and Lockout Conditions paragraph 3 250 Error Indications paragraph 3 252 Error Examples paragraph 3 255 Detailed Operating Instructions paragraph 3 257 Remote Programming via HP IB paragraph 3 260 Interface Commands paragraph 3 286 Programming Commands paragraph 3 312 Programming Examples paragraph 3 359 6 8 amp 9 e 60 9 90 909 9 G 3 4 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 3 5 The HP 5334A B is a universal counter provided with 100 MHz frequency range 2nssingle shot time interval resolution and frequency and period measurement resolution of nine digits per second of gate time The gate time is continuously adjustable in millisecond increments from 1 millisecond to 99 999 seconds An internal microcomputer performs the measurement calculations automatically taking into account the selected gate time Most measurements are displayed in engineering notation i e exponents of blank 0 3 6 or 9 3 6 The HP 5334A B is a fully HP IB IEEE
82. D PROGRAMMING 0 ccc nananana 3 1 Bel AM OCUCHON Soo EE ORE vet eee oneal MUN ed pr 3 1 3 4 Operating Characteristics 0 0 00 cc c ccc cece ccc caeuceuavecs 3 1 3 8 Basic Circuits and Measurements ccc paanan annau 3 2 3 1 Input Characteristics and Signal Conditioning 3 2 3 13 ANB Ore Eod QUSS ecd hae xoa esie uu dud eh ee T d 3 3 3 18 SGDSIHVI Lye 2b swe Ste pA traces prance DN pe Vds Ea Iro Bde 3 4 3 24 AC DC Coupling ci seva rr mere ane gs 3 6 3 26 Trigger Level rM 3 7 3 33 SIOpe COR 7 kare oars raat a B atacan 3 8 3 35 Input Impedance mess rorree red oe Ge adits Aa ade deb el 3 9 3 37 PREM ALOIS soara s da e e a EEE DET L i 3 9 3 40 D inape LEVET oi sireresdus testae bee Li iA a Ea tiran 3 9 3 42 separate Common A Input 2 pesca ppxx ve T REV eens ee 3 9 3 47 100 kHz Filter kits bnadens Pr MT PEE 3 9 3 49 AT miIng TUE caos bd bot od p E GIA pati b apes Se hate a tux SAID 3 591 How to Make Measurements s osse NT 3 10 3 54 Frequency Measurements cccccccccccccevccecccecs 3 11 3 60 Period Measurements leeeseeleeeeese essi 3 11 3 63 Time Interval Measurements 0 0 00 c eel 3 11 3 69 Time Interval Delay Measurements ccc nanunua 3 12 Hi HP 5334A B Table of Contents Section TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Title OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING Continued 3 71 Ratio Measurements eeeeeeeeeen eher 3 74 Totalize
83. E 3 MEASUREMENT AVERAGING Clear the HP 85 screen Send IN CO1 FN6 commands to the 5334A B The command IN sets counter to a known state C01 sets counter to Time Interval Delay mode Dimension X to 19 characters Read 5334A B measurement into Send contents of X to HP 85 Return to LINE 40 End program execution This example displays each measurement average sent to the HP 85 controller The program clears the HP 85 screen initializes the HP 5334A B to a known state selects the Pulse Width measurement mode and selects 100 Gate Average mode The variable X is dimensioned to 19 characters to accommodate the measurement output string The next measurement average is read into X then displayed on the HP 85 LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 LINE 70 screen The program then repeats averaging reading and displaying measurements Clear the HP 85 screen Send IN FN10 GV1 commands to the 5334A B The command IN sets counter to a known state FN10 sets counter to Pulse Width mode GYT sets counter to 100 Gate Average mode Dimension X to 19 characters Read 5334A B measurement into X Send contents of X to HP 85 screen Return to LINE 40 End program execution 3 93 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming EXAMPLE 4 DISPLAYING THE STATUS BYTE The following example reads the status byte of the 5334A B by conducting a serial pol
84. E ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays all dashes and Channel A trigger light stops flashing Set l CHAN A SOO Loocurea bares oet d ORNA BRUN DURER N d OFF Observe Condition prior to switching in 500 impedance Set CHANA AT E NOTTE ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays all dashes and Channel A tr gger light stops flashing T bus bead bing 10 11 12 AS 14 15 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Set CHAN A XICATIN Vasuues quieren vies S S eb botes OFF Observe Condition prior to switching in X10 attenuator Set 100 KHz FILTER A out be pe ws vat SU Duca rey a c CU ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays all dashes and Channel A trigger light stops flashing Set TOO EHE EILEER OA cesset L fees tpi t oui t OFF Observe Condition prior to switching in 100 kHz Filter Set CONI Torir h E rROC CVV e o Ua IA seer eds Dad ON Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel B Input Observe The HP 5334A B front panel stops updating and the trigger lights stop flashing trigger lights stop flashing Set Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 10 000 000 0 MHz 0 2 Hz Channel B trigger light flashing and Channel A trigger light not flashing Set CHAN B 500 see FREE ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays all dashes and Channel B trigger light stops flashing Set CHAN B 500 ses hance Mea ira E ra Gham Ua d
85. EL A using a BNC cable ed 561 552 563 564 5650 566 5570 5580 DISP 5890 O1SP R 5700 PAUSE 5710 CLEAR 5720 DISP Eg the counter E728 DISP will count the time base and service request mask will be 5740 DISP set The SRQ lamp will flash 5750 DISP S5 times on the counter and the 5750 DISP HP 85 screen will display the 5770 DISP count 5 times 5780 DISP 5790 DISP USING t K 3 AS 5800 PAUSE 5810 REMOTE A 5820 OUTPUT A IN FNI GAI MIS WAI 5830 CLEAR 5840 I 5850 STATUS T t Z 588580 ON INTR 7 GOTO 53009 25870 ENABLE INTR 748 5880 IF Is0 THEN DISP Is BNC cable connected 5890 GOTO 5830 5800 M SPOLLCA 5910 IF BIT M 2 THEN GOTO 5070 5920 IF BIT M 3 THEN GOTO 5070 5930 ENTER amp M 5840 IF I 0 THEN CLEAR 5850 DISP MS 5850 i I l 5870 IF I45 THEN GOTO 5870 5980 CLEAR 5980 DISP 5000 DISP Disconnect BNC cable 6010 DISP B020 DISP FS 6 30 PAUSE 6040 GOTO 7850 B050 STATUS 7 1 1 Z B080 CLEAR 6070 Rs 5080 GOSUB 8750 5880 DISP Disconnect BNC cable 5100 DISP 51180 DISP FS B120 PAUSE HP 5334A B Performance Tests 170 nj 53 S g CD tn UJ y UD UC O3 OC om a t P3 P3 Pa P3 Pa DP PF ij 3 P3 M GT UT e GI PS Se eo Co C3 amp ce j On C3 5290 6300 8310 6320 6330 6340 6350 6360 Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued GOTO 7970 CHECKPOINT 12 LO e i Status Byt
86. EL SENS l X10 ATTN 8X0 Set Input B Attenuation to X1 BX1 Set Input B Attenuation to X10 500 Z BZO Set Input B impedance to 1M ohm 871 Set Input B Impedance to 50 ohm COM A COO Set COMMON inputs off cot Set COMMON inputs on l 100 kHz FIO Set Input A Filter off FILTER A FIT Set Input A Filter on SENS SEO Set Sensitivity Mode Off m SET Set Sensitivity Mode On dACS OFF 5334A TRO Set Remote Trigger Sensitivity Levels Off dACS On 5334A TRI Set Remote Trigger Sensitivity Levels On START ARM XAT Set External Start Arm Slope to positive XA2 Set External Start Arm Off XA3 Set External Start Arm Slope to negative STOP ARM XO1 Set External Stop Arm Slope to positive XO2 Set External Stop Arm Off l XO3 Set External Stop Arm Slope to negative FUNCTION FREQ A Frequency A DATA FREQ B Frequency B FREQ C Frequency C PERIOD A Period A T I A B Time Interval A to B Td AB Time Interval A to B with delay DELAY RATIO A B Ratio A B 3 82 ig bie p COMMAND GROUP FUNCTION DATA GATE MATH MEMORY 5334A MISC AND SPECIAL FUNCTION HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming Table 3 12 HP 5334A B Programming Command Set Continued MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION EQUIVALENT KEY CONTROL TOT STOP A TOT START A PULSE WIDTH A RISE FALL TIME A DVM READ TRIG LEVELS READ PEAKS A READ PEAKS B GATE TIME DELAY SINGLE CYCLE 100 GATE AVERAGE DISABLE NORMALIZE OFFSET RECAL
87. ELECT TM no lockout MATH DISABLE no lockout AUO Figure 3 55 Rise Fall Time Measurements 3 61 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming EU 53344A UNIVERSAL COUNTER WEMLETT PAOKARO DVM 1DO AM re HP 53344 ONLY NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 HP 5334A ONLY Press POWER switch to ON position Connect signal to DVM INPUT jacks Press DVM function key AUTO TRIG will automatically turn off dU pU eS t GATE TIME is internally set at 50 ms and cannot be set via the front panel PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS 1 Preset conditions on initial selection of DVM EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SETTING HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND 1 ISINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout no lockout EXT ARM SELECT disabled in DVM mode ON XA1 XA3 OFF XO1 XO3 MATH DISABLE no lockout ON MD1 AUO 50 ms controlled by DVM AUTO TRIG GATE TIME ENTRY AUT GA lt n gt Figure 3 56 DVM Voltage Measurements 5334A Only 3 52 Ce NECKAR LX AN MM nnb GR eec CE RR a Es E E ead 2 ana ONE ON Lockout conditions during DVM mode a eee ARETE m te Er HP 5334A B Operation and Programming j RARARRPRPGIAP DAR Arran lt P bse NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1
88. F XA2 XO2 INITIALIZED MATH DISABLE ON MDI AT POWER UP GATE TIME set at 300 ms at power up only FREQ B SINGLE CYCLE GSO FN2 300 GATE AVERAGE GVO EXT ARMING XA2 XO2 MATH DISABLE MDI FREQ C SINGLE CYCLE FN3 100 GATE AVERAGE EXT ARMING MATH DISABLE AUTO TRIG PERIOD A SINGLE CYCLE S0 FN4 100 GATE AVERAGE GVO j EXT ARMING XA2 XO2 MATH DISABLE MDI T I A B SINGLE CYCLE FNS 100 GATE AVERAGE EXT ARMING i MATH DISABLE T A B SINGLE CYCLE DELAY 100 GATE AVERAGE FN6 EXT ARMING MATH DISABLE RATIO A B SINGLE CYCLE GSO none FN7 100 GATE AVERAGE GVO none EXT ARMING XA2 XO2 none MATH DISABLE MDI nene Calibration Data disallowed in Ratio mode TE TOT STOP A SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO ON GS1 FNB 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO ON GV1 EXT ARMING OFF XA2 XO2 none TOT START A MATH DISABLE ON MDI OFF MDO FN9 AUTO TRIG OFF AUO ON AUT GATE TIME ENTRY controlled by TOT STOP A ON GA n High Speed Mode OFF HSO ON HS1 Wait to be OFF WAQ ON WAT Addressed Mode Calibration Data disallowed in Totalize mode JC PULSE SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO WIDTH A 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO FN10 EXT ARMING SLOPES OFF XA2 XO2 MATH DISABLE l ON MDI AUTO TRIG ON AUT AUO X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG AX1 BX1 AXO0 BXO SENS OFF SEO SE1 DACS 5334A only OFF TRO TR1 High Speed Mode OFF HSO HS1 Calibration Data disallowed in Pulse Width mode TC HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 13 HP IB Pres
89. FFOF ADIGICRUORS cea dra oe teary cane RI RF E Kee Ree e 3 47 3 255 ERLOF Examples 2 ouibus x pru ra OAM RE raa de iud edat Vi 3 49 3 257 Detailed Operating Instructions ceceeeececeeeeeces 3 51 3 260 Remote Programming via HP IB cece eee eee eee 3 67 3 263 HP IB Description wince VE neh oS eee duoc vata i OS SR ace aes 3 67 3 266 interface System Terms eoecoux x S CE S A HERR E A UR 3 67 3 268 Major Interface Functions cooraxcse s ere REIR I ed 3 68 3 272 Interface Capabilities ocu vue Oona by ue eR EAE n RR IR ERE 3 68 3 277 Front Panel Interface Status LEDs 0 ce cece eee cee 3 70 3 279 Address Selection sco veg wank etek Rer De oie o dal vw eor Or 3 286 interface Commands ivo delere kh OO nora NOSE b TOR IE e 3 72 3 289 Device Independent Commands sse 3 72 3 292 Meta Messages v c ak RE EE EVECUPENRW A TERN ERA Se uds 3 75 3 298 Meta Message Response 2 oy 65 4 0 08 sar ose x aam use pde 3 75 3 299 SRG and Status Dyte xceuutost teoriene keuke een Ead uU SE EE 3 76 3 304 Service Request Mask svn etn ow enya NR vu E URERRASRSA A Por de 3 77 3 306 Device Dependent Commands cece ccc cee eee eens 3 78 3 308 Device Command Definitions asarassnarrararsrasans 3 78 3 310 Numeric Enti y vob rs A E cel A SPORE PRAE ME 3 79 3 312 Programming Commands ix oes dae vesauae eres udo Os 3 79 3 315 Command Group Descriptions 0006 PPS 3 80 3 320 Miscellaneous and Sp
90. Figure 3 17 Channel A Peak Voltage Measurement Display HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 16 3 88 INITIAL POWER UP CHECKS AND SELF DIAGNOSTICS 3 89 When power is applied to the HP 5334A B an automated internal check is made to several major components including the microprocessors and related circuitry During the power up cycle all front panel display indicators will light momentarily followed by momentary display of the instrument model number shown in Figure 3 18 HP 5334b will be displayed on the HP 5334B then the momentary display of the instrument s decimal HP 1B address e g Addr 03 The ARM and GATE lights will toggle back and forth briefly then on successful completion of all tests a PASS message will be displayed momentarily During the power up cycle the HP 5334A B checks the following a The three microprocessors Executive uP Measurement uP and HP IB uP perform a ROM and RAM check b The Measurement uP performs a limited 1 O port check The GATE and ARM annunciators flash if the tests pass up to this point c Communication is checked between the Executive and the Measurement microproces sors and between the Executive and HP IB microprocessors d The counter is checked for a timebase oscillator e The HP 1B address is read from the CMOS RAM and checked for validity f A front panel display check is performed during which all front panel LED s are turned on except STANDBY and th
91. GO 010 89020 8030 8040 8050 8058 8070 080 50980 5100 8119 8120 atat 81 815 GibQO 3170 8180 8130 Fa C4 F O S m HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued REWIND CLEAR DISP USING 5 HISP HS DISP DISR END OF HP S334 B HP IB GISP OPERATION VERIFICATION PROGRAM DISP DISP END H SUBROUTINE TO PRINT CHECKPOINT HEADINGS CLEAR DISP H DISP RETURN SUBPROGRAM TO TERMINATE CHECKPOINT EXECUTION DISP DISP Fs PAUSE GOSUB 7399 SOSUB 8170 GOTO 8420 SUBROUTINE TO PROMPT USERFOR CHECKPOINT RESULTS CLEAR m DISP Press the soft key correspondingto the results of this DISP checkpoint i DISP DISP PASS Press K to indicate that tne S334A B8 passed DISP DISP FAIL Press K4 to indicate that the 52345 B failed ON KEYS PASS GOTO 8130 OFF KEY 3 ON KEYP 4 FAIL GOTO 8158 KEY LABEL GOTO 8120 RCS 22 RETURN RCS RETURN SUBROUTINE TO DETERMINE NEXT PROGRAM STEP CLEAR 4 63 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 8220 8230 8240 8250 8250 8279 3280 8280 8300 8310 3320 8330 8340 8350 853550 837 8280 5380 8400 B amp iQ0 8420 8430 8440 8450 8480 5470 8480 84980 8500 8579 8520 Y Sal 8540 8550 8580 8570 8580 8590 8600 8610 8620 8620 8640 8550 8680 8670 6680 X3 x at eui 69 700 7160 Xi g 4 64 Table 4 4
92. GOTO 8830 bis P The HP 85 has verified that the 533468 B failed this checkpoint AWAIT 3000 RETURN E EN A ny PROS 2 DISP The HP 85 has verified that the 5334A 8 passed this checkpoint WAIT 3000 RETURN 4 65 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 66 This page intentionally left blank
93. GSO no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO GV1 EXT ARM SELECT disabled in PEAK LEVELS XA1 XA3 MD1 MDO AUT AUO X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG AX1 BX1 AXO BXO XO1 XO3 ISENS OFF SEQ SET IDACS 5334A only OFF TRO TRI IGATE TIME ENTRY disabled in PEAK LEVELS GA lt n gt Figure 3 59 Channel B Peak Voltage Measurements 3 65 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming TEE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD pe Mey ics i EE f a ink ESSE PER bok BIETET OR AR RN NOTE For specifications concerning range and accuracy on gate time E 1 Press POWER switch to ON position pam X d S V3 2 Press GATE TIME DELAY key to ON position current gate time setting will be displayed asshown above ENTRY light will flash indicating counter is in data entry mode g E gt 2 is 3 Press appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys digits and special functions are labeled to the left of each key m NOTE Entry may be made in decimal form scientific or engineering d a PT PONES Poe RSEN aaae aani Adanan E bia n Ed notation EER 4 Press GATE TIME DELAY key to OFF position selected setting will be stored settings refer to Table 1 1 TURO j Figure 3 60 Gate Time Delay Setting x Jd 3 66 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 260 REMOTE PROGRAMMING VIA HP iB 3 261 The HP 5334A 8B Universal Counter
94. Graph 4 1 2 hysteresis band or Input slew rate at start trigger point 1 2 hysteresis band whichever is the aa e i aa a PE T t e tae att Trigger Level Setting Error see Graph 5 Rise Fall Time measurements 40 mV Input slew rate at trigger point Pulse Width and Time interval measurements 80 mV 1 of trigger level reading TI only Input slew rate at start trigger point 30 mV 1 of trigger level reading TI only Input siew rate at stop trigger point Trigger Point and Hysteresis Actual Trigger Point i Slope 1 2 Hystersis Band l Trigger Point 1 2 Hystersis Band Actual Trigger i Point i Siope At Trigger Level Timing Error Auto trigger disabled trigger point trigger levei reading Auto trigger enabled For all measurements except Rise Fall Time trigger points Maximum peak Minimum peak cy ATTN E gt d d d For Rise Fall Time 10 trigger point 1 maximum peak 9 minimum peak X ATTN 90 trigger point 9 maximum peak 1 minimum peak X ATTN AC DC Voltage function is used to measure peaks HP 5334A B General Information 1 12 INSTRUMENT AND MANUAL IDENTIFICATION 1 13 The instrument serial number is located on the heat sink next to the power input module on the rear panel of the instrument Hewlett Packard instruments have a 10 character serial number in the form 0000A00000 The first four digits and the letter are the seria
95. HANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 Instruments This test is for instrument that contain the Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs i e instruments with both Front and Rear Inputs Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Option 060 Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifications Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and two different frequency settings Frequencies and conditions tested 80 MHz and 100 MHz dc coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm 79 REF IN 5334A 8 8660A C UNIVERSAL SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 4 6 Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060 4 21 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Equipment Signal Generator sse ten HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency oos eo Ree Penne nae noe eo reta 80 MHz Amplitud iiec eves tenet acne denen coats meses 50 mV rms 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FLINCTION 3 14 bodes meer ewe ma Qupd S V n EU use a FREQ SENS IIo reda dae sace eua eva ee Nome puse a Mabel ON CHAN A TRIG SENS control oo eee e cree eres n fully cw 3 Connect 50 Ohm feedthroughs or terminations on the rear panel A and B Inputs 4 Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A B front panel Input A as shown in Figure 4 6 VERIFY The Counter di
96. HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued DISP Press a soft key to select the desired checkpoint DISP DISP NEXT Press Ki to perform the next checkpoint DISP DISP REPEAT Press K3 to repeat this checkpoint DISP DISP GOTOS Press KA to select an arbitrary checknoint ON KEY 1 NEXT GOTO 8320 ON KEY 3 REPEAT GOTO 8248 ON KEY 4 GOTO GOTO 8360 KEY LABEL 60TO 8319 D S RETURN D 5 RETURN CLEAR DISP Enter checkpoint number desired to 14 and press END LINE DISP Q9 TERMINATES PROGRAM INPUT D IF D lt OR O gt 14 THEN 83560 RETURN SUBPROGRAM TO BRANCH EXECUTION TO DESIRED CHECKPOINT IF 0 0 THEN 7259 IF D 7 THEN 8470 ON D GOTO 19856 2270 2840 3050 3450 2800 4230 ON D 7 GOTO 4450 4830 5170 5600 6140 6230 6630 7250 SUBROUTINE TO PROMT USER AND PAUSE DISP DISP A PAUSE RETURN SUBROUTINE TO BEEP AND WAIT 1 5 SECONDS BEEP 250 20 WAIT 1500 RETURN SUBROUTINE TO READ A STATUS BYTE M NO DATA READ B SPOLL A WAIT 1000 CLEAR DISP The correct value for the status byte after reset is IB DISP DISP The returned value of the status byte is B IF B 16 THEN RsR TF B lt gt 16 THEN R ReQ DISP HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued DISP FS PAUSE RETURN UBROUTINE TO INFORM USER THAT THE HP 85 HAS VERIFIED THE TEST EAR R 1 THEN
97. Hz dc coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 50 Ohm o334A 8 8660A C UNIVERSAL oo 1 SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER SON FEEDTHROUGH Figure 4 4 Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 80 MHz 100 MHz Equipment Signal Generator 2 cece eee eee eee eneee HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency occ cece cere erect ener e esate cteereees 80 MHz Amplitude siris srir sees enne nere nee do mV FMS 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION arret ta Saca item oda aa ves weer ad FREQ A SENS sis eocr Lada adeo ead Rx a Rea ec d Feb saad hes ON CHAN A TRIG SENS control ceeeee nn fully cw ws A Ds p HP 5334A B Performance Tests 3 Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A B Input A using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 4 VERIFY The Counter displays 80 MHz 2 Hz 4 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 13 5 Set the signal generator as follows dics dp CT EP 100 MHz Amplitude Boog or appe sage ikebana rro rak raaa 35 mV rms VERIFY The Counter displays 100 MHz 2 Hz 6 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 14 7 Setthe signal generator as follows Frequenti eese sod ox ev EA LS kal oro i qd 80 MHz PIN DNC Sh stars Varas pedi edebat uu 35 mV rms 8 Set the HP 5334A B as follows VERIFY The Counter displays
98. IL and 3 Common for the default CHL programming 3 91 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming mode or short together pins 3 Common and 4 NAT for the native HP 1B mode No matter what the jumper setting is either native or CIIL language can be selected via programming commands Switching the Counter off and then on restores the language selected by the jumper When in CHL mode sending the CHL operation code GAL Go to Alternate Language switches the HP 5334B to its native HP 1B language When in native language sending the com mand CIIL to the Counter will cause it to switch to the CHL programming mode For complete CIIL programming information and Error Messages refer the HP 5334B OPTION 700 INTERNAL CHL INTERFACE OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL HP Part Number 05334 90034 EXAMPLE 1 IDENTIFYING AND INITIALIZING THE HP 5334A B The following example demonstrates how to identify the device at address 03 and how to initialize the counter The program clears the HP 85 screen clears the HP 5334A B then requests the instrument identification THe response is read into A then displayed and printed by the controller The program then sends the IN command which initializes the counter The counter responds by setting the initialized states as follows all gate math memory and input signal conditioning will be OFF the function will be FREQ A with AUTO TRIG and auto attenuation ON gat
99. L 5334A STORE 5334A none POWER ON none none none none none FNB FN9 FN10 FN11 FN12 FN13 FN14 FN15 FUT FU15 GA lt num gt GSO GS1 GVO GV1 MDO MD1 MN lt num gt MO lt num gt MRO MR9 MS0 MS9 SM lt num gt TC TE Totalize Stop A Totalize Start A Pulse Width A Rise Fall Time A Voltage Mode Read A and B Channel Trigger Levels Read Channel A Peaks Read Channel B Peaks SAME AS FN1 through FN15 Set Gate Time lt value gt Gate time range is 0 001 to 99 999s Set Single Gate Cycle Off Set Single Gate Cycle On Set 100 Gate Average Off Set 100 Gate Average On Set Math Disable Off Set Math Disabie On Set Normalize lt value gt Value Range is 1E 10 to 9 999 999EF 9 zero is disallowed Set Offset value Value Range is 1E 10 to 9 999 999E 9 zero is allowed Recall Setup from Register 0 9 Store Setup into Register 0 97 High Speed Output Mode Off High Speed Output Mode On Device Identification Initialize Reset Set SRQ Mask Refer to Status Byte Transmit Calibration Data Transmit Error Refer to Error Handing Wait To Be Addressed Mode Off Wait To Be Addressed Mode On 3 83 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 84 3 333 Output Formats 3 334 Most HP 5334A B measurements are output to the HP IB in scientific notation while the HP 5334A B display is given in engineering notation The output data contains 19 charac
100. MD1 FN15 AUTO TRIG ON AUT X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG SENS OFF SEO TRO DACS 5334A only OFF GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in PEAK LEVEL High Speed Mode OFF HSO Calibration Data disallowed in Peak Levels mode 3 90 E i2 E 2 wr Parent Lir HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 13 HP IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions Continued PRESET CONDITIONS DISALLOWED CONDITIONS EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT PARAMETER SETTING HP IB SETTING HP iB COMMAND COMMAND AUTO TRIG ON AUT ON OFF AX1 BX1 AX0 BX0 X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG SENS OFF SEO none Note if SENS is turned ON AUTO TRIG is turned OFF DACS 5334A only OFF TRO none Note if DACS are turned ON AUTO TRIG is turned OFF TRIGGER levels set internally controls disabled LEVEL SENS COM A ON CO1 INPUT B coupling controlled by INPUT A 500 Z INPUT B impedance controlled by INPUT A IMQ Z AUTO TRIG OFF AUO none Note if AUTO TRIG is turned ON SENS is turned OFF SENS ON SE1 DACS ON AUTO TRIG OFF TR1 Note if AUTO TRIG is turned ON DACS are turned OFF 5334A only TRIGGER levels set with AT lt num gt and BT lt num gt l LEVEL SENS commands 3 359 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 3 360 The following examples demonstrate the programming capabiliti
101. NAL OPERATING RANGE Figure 3 2 Invalid Input Signal Conditions 3 3 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 17 The dynamic range puts a further restriction on the allowable signal peaks as specified by the signal operating range For optimum performance the signal peaks must stay within the signal operating range specification and the peak to peak value must stay within the maximum dynamic range specification as shown in Figure 3 3 MAXIMUM PEAK TO PEAK TRIGGER OF DYNAMIC LEVEL RANGE SIGNAL OPERATING RANGE Figure 3 3 Valid Input Signal Conditions 3 18 SENSITIVITY 3 19 Sensitivity is the lowest amplitude signal at a particular frequency that the counter will count The amplifier gain and the voltage difference between the input trigger hysteresis levels determine the counter s sensitivity Sensitivity is specified with the trigger level set at a value equal to the midpoint of the input signal The input waveform must cross both upper and lower hysteresis levels to generate a count as shown in Figure 3 4 UPPER HYSTERESIS LEVEL PEAK TO PEAK __ _ TRIGGER SENSITIVITY LEVEL LOWER HYSTERESIS LEVEL INPUT SIGNAL TO COUNTER Signal cresses through both hysteresis levels to effect a count Figure 3 4 Acceptable Peak to Peak Amplitude 3 4 ned i HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 20 If the signal peaks do not exceed beyond both hysteresis limits the input signal will not gen
102. OFF Observe Condition prior to switching in 500 impedance Set CHAN BHO ATIN Loro us ko ERI dpi eeu uh ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays ail dashes and Channel B trigger light stops flashing 4 7 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 16 Set CHANB XO ATTEN arnore TNE Fete tu oM aes OFF Observe Condition prior to switching in X10 ATTN Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 5 What Checked Relays and circuitry For Failures Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The Input Amplifier and Executive Blocks are the main components of this test Other blocks involved are DAC Measurement and Front Panel blocks 4 21 T l A B Description Slope switch verification Procedure 1 Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the ranie A Input 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B COMA Dos cheese act hte dana as EU EN ROSA E P E ded ON TRIGGER LEVEL controls eene set to OV 0 2V using READ LEVELS L mode AUTO TRG eui ca dots aste wor bap o ao RD SUE EAR Red ed OFF CHAN A und B SOD inci se th LHP oo RR RR ON GATE TIME one d ate bean EA MS aic Gaede 1 Second FUNCTION DRIED ab auasa st eset T L A B Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 0 ns 6 ns 3 Set both Channel A and B to Negative SLOPE esee ON Counter now triggers on negative slope Observe The HP 5334A B front pan
103. OMINAL in Sensitivity Mode Auto Trigger See Automatic Measurements Section Accuracy Read Levels X1 30 mV 1 of trigger level reading X10 300 mV 1 of trigger level reading Coupling ac or dc switch selectable Trigger Stope independent selection of or stope impedance ft 1 MO NOMINAL shunted by 60 pF or 500 NOMINAL switch selectable Attenuator Manual X1 or X10 NOMINAL switch selectable Auto Attenuator automatically switched when in Auto Trigger mode See Automatic Measurements Section Low Pass Filter 100 kHz NOMINAL switchable in or out of Channel A Damage Level 500 5V rms 1 MD X1 O to 3 5 kHz 200V idc peak aci 3 5 kHz to 100 KHz 5 x 105V rms H2 FREQ 2100 kHz 5V rms i 1 MOQ X10 O to 35 kHz 200V dc peak ac 35 kHz to 100 kHz 5 x 106V rms Hz FREQ 7100 kHz SOV rms Common Input All specifications are the same as for separate operation except for the following Sensitivity 15 mV rms sine wave to 20 MHz 75 mV rms sine wave to 100 MHz 210 mV peak to peak at a minimum pulse width of 5 ns Dynamic Range X1 45 mV to 5V peak to peak to 20 MHz 210 mV to 2 5V peak to peak to 100 MHz Impedancet 500 k NOMINAL shunted by 85 pF or 500 NOMINAL EXTERNAL ARM Front panei ARM input can be used to determine Start and or Stop point of a measurement Externat Arm can be used with all measurements except DVM HP 5334A and Read Levels Minimum Start to Stop Time 50 ns M
104. ONENT SIGN indicates the polarity of the displayed exponent ON if negative OFF blank if positive EXPONENT The EXPONENT LED displays the value of the exponent of the measurement Measurements are displayed with exponents of blank 0 3 6 9 When the READ LEVELS key is enabled the exponent is used to display L A or b for trigger levels input A or input B peak levels respectively Qv The V Volts annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the voltage domain in units of Volts eu The Hz Hertz annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the frequency domain in units of Hertz Q s The Seconds annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the time domain inunits of Seconds E REM The REM annunciator lights when the 5334A B is under remote control Refer to Remote Programming via the HP B paragraph 3 260 for further information Figure 3 38 Front Panel Display and Annunciators 3 207 The front panel Display and Annunciators are shown and described in Figure 3 38 Front Panel Display and Annunciators 3 37 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 30 Q isn The LSN annunciator lights when the 5334A B is addressed to listen Referto Remote Programming via the HP IB paragraph 3 260 for further information nx The TLK annunciator lights when the 5334A B is addressed to talk or when it is being used in the TALK ONLY mode Refer to Remote
105. Programming Table 3 8 Device Independent Commands ttention Device Clear EOI End or Identify GET Group Execute Trigger GTL Go To Local IFC Interface Clear LADn Listen Address n LLO Local Lockout My Listen Address My Talk Address Not Remote Enable Null Remote Enable Seiected Device Clear Serial Poll Disable Serial Poll Enable Talk Address n Unlisten Untalk 3 291 The instrument response to the device independent commands is listed below ATN DCL EOI GET GTL IFC LADn LLO MLA MTA NRE NUL Alerts the instrument that a device independent message is being sent so the instrument is ready to accept data on the data lines and interpret it as commands This command aborts the current measurement aborts all pending send data commands resets the gate and clears the display It is similar to the front panel RESET LOCAL key except that it only clears errors 1 0 through 4 4 If Attention is false and the instrument is a listener EO acts as a message delimiter and indicates the last data byte of a multibyte sequence if the instrument is addressed to listen GET aborts the current measurement and triggers the next measurement immediately It is equivalent to pressing the RESET key or another function key If the instrument is addressed to listen GTL returns the instrument to local front pane operation Local lockout is not cleared The instrument untalks an
106. S TO SOCKET OUTLETS PROVIDED WITH PROTECTIVE EARTH CONTACTS DO NOT NEGATE THE EARTH GROUND ING PROTECTION BY USING EXTENSION CABLES POWER CABLES OR AUTOTRANSFORMERS WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GROUND CONDUCTORS FAILURE TO GROUND THE INSTRU MENT CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY REFER TO PARA GRAPH 2 18 2 1 HP 5334A B Installation 2 2 CAUTION BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT make sure it is adapted to the voltage o the ac power source You must set the voltage selector card correctly to adapt the HP 5334A B to the power source as described in paragraph 2 13 Failure to set the ac power input of the instrument to the correct voltage level could cause damage to the instrument when plugged in 2 13 LINE VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS The HP 5334A is equipped with a power module on the rear panel that contains a printed circuit line voltage selector to select 100 120 220 or 240 volt ac operation as shown in Figure 2 1 The HP 5334B rear panel contains two Power and Line Voltage Select Slide switches to select 100 115 or 230 voit ac operation as shown in Figure 2 2 Before applying power the pc selector or slide switches must be set to the correct position and correct fuse must be installed as described below 2 14 HP 5334A LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION Power line connections are selected by the position of the plug in circuit card in the module When the card is plugged into the module the oniy visible markings on the card indica
107. TERFACE STATUS LED S 3 278 The four Interface Status LED s on the front panel indicate the remote status of the HP 5334A B The REM LED lights to indicate the HP 5334A B is under remote control The TLK LED lights to indicate the HP 5334A B is addressed to talk send data The LSN LED lights to indicate the HP 5334A B is addressed to listen receive commands The SRQ LED lights to indicate a service request condition exists as determined by a set service request mask bit 3 279 ADDRESS SELECTION 3 280 To use the HP 5334A B in an HP IB system set the instrument to the desired address as listed in Table 3 7 The ADDRESSABLE mode is used whenever a calculator or other controller is used with the system and the HP 5334A B functions as a talker and listener The TALK ONLY mode is used when the HP 5334A B is operating under its own control no controller on bus and outputting results to another device on the bus such as a plotter or a printer In the TALK ONLY mode the HP 5334A B functions only in an output condition and the receiving device must have LISTEN ONLY capability pr pan ini M 4 pg HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 281 Refer to Table 3 7 for all possible address settings and the corresponding ASCII codes for talk and listen in the ADDRESSABLE mode and in the TALK ONLY mode The HP 5334A B is factory set to address 03 To set or change the HP 5334A B address proceed as follows 3 282 SETTING THE HP
108. TY TEST HP 5334B This test is for HP 5334Bs containing Option 030 Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for the Channel C specifications Description Channel C is tested at various frequencies and signal levels BNC m TO N m 8660A C UNIVERSAL COUNTER SIGNAL GENERATOR N m TO BNCF o a d i n So eieio j i 84891A OPTION O10 10 dB ATTENUATOR NCFf TO BNC f Figure 4 16 HP 5334B Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup Equipment Signal Generator seeceeeeeeeeeseee HP 8660A C 10 dB Attenuator 0 M HP 8491A Adapter Nim to BNC m eesessses HP 1250 0082 Adapter Nit to BNGID xoosckt eed extis HP 1250 1474 Adapter Nim to BNC f 2 0 cece eee eee HP 1250 0780 Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency Cos sale tie dota bie 90 MHz ATBDICUUS aara rea ace ead Rea ee eR 13 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator 4 35 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 2 Set the HP 5334B as follows Reinitialize the 5334B FUNCTION oaa d cde thats GER ER RE FREQ C 3 Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334B Input C through a 10 dB attenuator NOTE The 10 dB attenuator is used here for impedance matching VERIFY The Counter displays 90 0 MHz 2 Hz 4 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 53 5 Setthe signal gen
109. UT A FNG GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A FN7 608UB 8540 OUTPUT A FN8 GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A FNS9 GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A FNiQ G0SUB 8540 OUTPUT A FN11 G0SUB 8540 OUTPUT A FN12 GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A FNI GOTO 7960 l CHECKPOINT 4 mode annunciators light in sequence FREQ A t A tone will sound 4 53 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued ES verify that the display annunciators SLOPE X10 AC 50 Z FILTER A and COMA light in that order for INPUT amp A tone will sound to mark each input change 4 Ag REMOTE A OUTPUT A IN AUB WAIT 1000 OUTPUT A AST SOSUR 8548 OUTPUT A ASO AXI GOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A AXO AAT GQSUB 8540 OUTPUT A AAG AZI SOSUB 8540 OUTPUT A 3 AZ FI GOSUB 8540 3310 GUTPUT A FIO COI 3320 G60SUB 8540 3330 OUTPUT A COQ 3340 CLEAR 2350 DISP The 5334A B is in the READ PEAKS Amode 3360 DISP 335870 OUTPUT amp IN FNI4 i 3380 DISP D8 shows 0 00 0 00 A 23380 DISP 32400 DISP FS 3410 PAUSE 3420 CLEAR 3430 OUTPUT A IN AUG 3440 GOTO 79859 3450 3450 CHECKPOINT 5 3470 I 2 Input Conditioning Channel B 525 G60SUB 7816 DISP Eg verify that DISP the display annunciators SLOPE DISP X10 AC and 50 Z light in thatorder for INPUT B A tone will DISP sound to mark each input change DISP DISP USING t K 3 AS PAUSE REMOTE A OUTPUT A IN AUS
110. a a 206653630 Ae Due y eq fore run SII 1 Hill E o e TA aliii OT x SS38Q0v l ns 9 POY LDO NI 000 o0 O VE Han EN ANO WWie Toy bip BUAS ANALNO Ag 8 Inang 080 O 010 O ponpa 3SVB8 JWIL pem SNOLLAO 4 j YOy afr4309 0 pto At o ON INUYM LO373S ANTI xe TANYE SOIAMSS I7 SHOO RESH HONI 9 Grula mi Ne M o C9 D INdNI I Gan kaon y NO11nVO Buruwv pue Pej 93su g jsuue9u5 2 euueuog g peuuguj y UO Suo oOsuUYSD OgO vordo ui O90 uot4do ONG Ndu LS_Le4eYy OSO uorado 48908 Jewog OY GveeS dH AL BAT POedSSBU ndug ao pe4gaeueB st 4nd4no o4 eseg ewr S49g JOo430euuo53 ONE uDBrtH Tp uedo st 8789 USUM O4IAS BUIO4XG BUvEe LUT 4nd4no 4nduj eseg suit 4040euuoj JNE ndro 8489 oe43u9052 18407 AaeBB ra uy SAO n Mise py eseg eur l EE EDAD C Re ee B SAYATY WL OS G3HH3i y 1icTiwWi 3818 t SSdHGUY 1 1 MEUS XVW YAOS ZM89 JINI dH A i rav oso a sind W j Buruay pue r euueus g P8SL1193SUI WAG DPer 9gE3SuJ r j9uuguo 9 euugu v HO S40409uuoo OZO uoet4do u3t 090 uotado ogo uot4dO u 1 OSO ueta3do ONG PN dup ei 8ed 090 uot4do VESS dH epinpow 4amod OY HP 5334A B Operation and Programming i Figure 3 40 REAR PANEL FEATURES CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS 3 40 e HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 208 REAR PANEL CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS 3 209 A number of signal inputs outputs and controls are provided on the
111. able 1 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF Connect signal to INPUT A jack NOTE This mode will totalize EVENTS on Channel A for the elapsed time between selection of TOT Start and TOT Stop using the front panel keys 4 Press TOT START A function key AUTO TRIG will automatically turn off 5 Press AC IDC 500 Z 1M0 SLOPE and X10 X1 ATTN keys to appropriate positions 6 Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position LED ON rotate TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control fully ccw This sets the trigger level at 0 voits nominally and sensitivity to minimum 7 Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control in a clockwise direction until Channel A trigger light begins to flash 8 Press RESET to clear display 9 Press TOT START A to start a totalize measurement press TOT STOP A to stop totalizing Repeat this procedure to accumulate counts Press RESET to clear display and enable a new measurement PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Preset conditions on initial selection of TOT START A Lockout conditions during TOTALIZE mode z EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SEM HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE OFF GS1 GV1 no lockout MDO F AUT GATE TIME ENTRY controlled by TOT STOP A GA lt n gt Figure 3 53 Totalize Measurements 3 59 HP 5334A B m Operation and Programming v Aere ete Dr ee as A TTT ST T MSS
112. ace the fuse a b 05305 80205 Disconnect the power cord Unscrew the special BNC barrel HP Part Number 05305 60205 With needle nose pliers remove and replace the fuse Reinstall the BNC barrel and tighten using a BNC cable connector Be careful not to overtighten SPECIAL BODY HEX NUT BNC 05305 20104 OS90 0058 LOCKWASHER FUSE 2190 0124 2110 0301 wis MINI CONNECTOR TELFON INSULATOR 05305 60206 05305 20105 Figure 3 41 Details of INPUT C BNC Connector and Fuse Mounting 5334A Only 3 237 Power Up Warm up 3 238 The HP 5334A B has a two position power switch STANDBY and ON For the HP 5334A B Option 010 High Stability Time Base it is important that the instrument remain connected to the power source in the STANDBY mode when not in use This supplies power to the standby LED and to the crystal oscillator oven maintaining a constant oven temperature thus eliminating the need for a warm up period When the STANDBY mode is not used and power is disconnected from the instrument allow 30 minutes from the application of external power in the ON mode for the instrument crystal oven to warm up WARNING POWER IS ALWAYS PRESENT AT THE LINE SWITCH STANDBY LED AND TRANSFORMER AND UNREGULATED DC IS PRESENT WHENEVER THE LINE CORD iS CONNECTED TO THE POWER SOURCE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CORD IS NECESSARY TO REMOVE ALL POWER FROM THE INSTRUMENT HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 44
113. ad the binary value of n into the service request mask register The n represents the binary sum of the bits conditions you want enabled The SM command is discussed in further detail in paragraph 3 304 3 328 SMO Service Request Mask Off Sending the command SM0 masks off or disables all SRQ conditions When this command is sent no condition will enable a service request 3 329 TC Transmit Calibration Data When the controller sends the TC command the counter sends a string of calibration data preceded by a C and followed by a carriage return and a line feed The counter will wait until the calibration data is read then resume taking measurements The output format and the use of calibration data is discussed in paragraph 3 349 3 330 TE Transmit Error When the transmit error command is received the instrument will send the number of the detected error to the controller The TE command clears the Error bit bit 2 in the counter s serial poll byte It is recommended that TE be sent in a string by itself not at the end of another string The counter will discontinue normal operation until the error message is read Note that reading the error code will not clear the error 3 331 WA1 Wait To Be Addressed Mode On WAT places the instrument in the Wait To Be Addressed Mode The wait to be addressed mode forces the instrument to suspend subsequent measurements and wait for the current measurement to be read by
114. ae exse AURA 3 36 3 206 Front Panel Display and Annunciators 0cceeceeeeeees 3 37 3 208 Rear Panel Controls and Connectors ccc cee ee cece erence 3 41 3 210 HP 5334A AC Power input Module zx ok dace Sei ya 3 41 3 212 HP 5334B AC Power Input Circuit 0 cece eee ee ee anes 3 41 3 214 GATE OUT Connector HP 5334A Only 2 0 00 cee cee ewes 3 41 3 216 TIME BASE IN OUT Connector sacicciagcuisvseie eee evewsnse 3 41 3 210 TIME BASE AD Control saiieceave sone eh eure e tet tienneen 3 41 3 220 TIME BASE INI EXT Switch o re Idekua iS seed wero caves 3 42 3 222 HP IB Interface Connector 0 ccc eect cece eene 3 42 3 224 Arm Trigger Level Control HP 5334A Only ssssn 3 42 3 226 Rear Panel INPUT Connectors Option 060 0 000 3 42 3 229 Option 010 Oven Oscillator Control HP 5334A Only 3 42 3 231 Address Switch HP 5334B Only ssseeeoee eee eene 3 42 3 233 Operator s Maintenance ioo av eye nae eee as QU RE Fe ere vers 3 42 3 235 Replacing C Channel Fuse HP 5334A only 0000 ue 3 43 3 237 Power Up Warm up i Stas Micra n NU p CUR Reda 3 43 3 240 Operator s Checks 60404 ceva viene PR VE URNA VADER AN E ENDO 3 44 3 242 Power Up Self Check ueccaevesevea ves Cie eter n ra n 3 44 3 246 Diagnostic SEQUENCE oocrsi o xaaga vC CER eR A AIL AE ER E 3 45 3 250 Preset and Lockout Conditions Seu es bitis 3 46 25252 E
115. age of 1 the power source The nominal line voltage to which the instrument must be connected is indicated by the illustrated switch setting combinations shown on the rear panel under LINE SELECT see Figure 2 2 j 3 214 GATE OUT Connector HP 5334A Only j 3 215 GATE OUT is a BNC output connector that permits the activity of the counter s internal E gate to be monitored When the gate is open indicated by the GATE LED in the Front Panel display the GATE OUT generates a TTL high This output can be connected to an oscilloscope to provide a visual indication of when a measurement occurs or the duration of a measurement 3 216 TIME BASE IN OUT Connector 3 217 Time Base IN OUT is a BNC connector that can be used asan input or output depending on the position of the Time Base INT EXT switch When used as an Output the connector provides a sine wave signal from the HP 5334A B internal 10 MHz time base that may be usedasa i reference for other instruments If the reference to the HP 5334A B is provided from another source the IN OUT connector can be used as an Input and will accept a 10 MHz signal 3 218 TIME BASE AD Control 3 219 The Time Base ADJ control allows the adjustment of the internal reference oscillator 3 without requiring removal of the instrument covers 3 41 HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming 3 42 3 220 TIME BASE INT EXT Switch 3 221 The Time Base INT EXT switch sets the function of the correspon
116. ailures Any failures during the power up cycle will disable the counter and produce a display of a numbered Error or Fail message For a GESCHBROR of failure messages refer to Error indications in Section ill of this manual Additional Comments The HP 5334A B can be put into a diagnostic mode where it repeatedly cycles through the power up self tests This is accomplished by pressing the RESET LOCAL key s while switching the power ON The tests are repeated until the power is switched to STANDBY NOTE In the diagnostic mode neither the instrument model number nor the HP iB address is displayed HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 17 READ LEVELS Description Checking the operation of the READ LEVELS function can indicate the health of several circuits critical to the operation of the counter Procedure 1 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B No Input Signal READ LEVELS seeeeeenn M E Trigger Levels Press once to display trigger level settings indicated on the display by an L in the place of the exponent value Rotate each front panel TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control fully counterclockwise then fully clockwise Observe The voltage extremes displayed should be lt 5V and gt 45V respectively From the fully clockwise position slowly rotate each control counterclockwise then clockwise past the midpoint position where the displayed voltage is approximately OV Observ
117. al allowing the two internal MRC registers to begin accumulating counts The MRC Event and Time Registers count pulses from the input signal and the internal time base clock respectively during the time interval that the gate is open During this same time interval the interpolator circuitry determines where in relation to the 100 nanosecond time base pulses the counter s gate actually opens and closes For instance if the gate opens precisely between two 100 nanosecond pulses the start interpolator wili determine that a 50 nanosecond adjustment is needed A similar adjustment is made by the stop interpolator for the gate closing 3 346 Atthe end of the complete measurement the data from both interpolators is combined with the count in the MRC Time Register to calculate the precise gate time interval The counter s built in microprocessor multiplies the number of accumulated clock pulses by the clock period combined with the interpolator adjustments to get TIME Then computes frequency by dividing EVENTS TIME or computes period by dividing TIME EVENTS This computation is done automatically by the arithmetic unit of the microprocessor and the results are sent directly tothe counter s display 3 347 Since none of these calculations are done by the counter in the High Speed Output mode raw data may be output at rates of up to 140 measurements per second This allows the operator to manipulate or process the raw data with an external calcu
118. and SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS paragraphs in Section V l 4 9 Additionally to maintain peak instrument performance between yearly checks the instruments containing the standard time base crystal oscillator i e all non Option 010 units shouid be adjusted every 3 months to a house frequency standard using Adjustment Procedure 5 15 Reieienco Oscillator Adjustment in Section V of this manual Again refer to the preliminary instructions before beginning the adjustment procedure 4 10 TEST PROCEDURES 4 11 It is assumed that the person performing the following tests understands how to operate the specified test equipment Equipment settings otherthan those for the Universal Counter are stated in general terms It is also assumed that the person performing the tests will supply whatever cables connectors and adapters that are necessary 4 12 OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION TESTS 4 13 The tests included here are not as thorough and exhaustive as the performance tests This group of tests is intended only to serve as a method for giving the operator a high degree of confidence that the instrument is performing properly No attempt is made to check the specifications of the instrument HP 5334A 8 Performance Tests 4 14 These tests are useful for incoming QA or as a first check on an instrument suspected of having a problem 4 15 Preliminary Procedure CAUTION Before the Universal Counter is switched on it must be se
119. and all changes through the Series Prefix of your instrument or board Insert any complete replacement pages provided into your manual in the proper Location If your manual has been updated according to the last edition of this supple ment you need only perform those changes pertaining to the new series prefix See List of Effective Pages on the reverse side of this page New information affecting All Serials will be indicated by a 4 in front of the page number U HEWLETT PACKARD MANUAL CHANGES MODEL 5334A 05334 90028 undi LLL L LL LL ll ODORE SERIAL PREFIX OR SERIAL NUMBER Macc dcl a ML D LADIES PAGE 1 2 GENERAL INFORMATION All Serials Trigger Level Accuracy Read Levels gt Change second line to read X10 300 mV 1 of trigger level reading NOMINAL PAGE 1 5 TABLE 1 1 HP MODEL 5334A B SPECIFICATIONS Continued All Serials OPTIONS OPTION 010 High Stability Timebase Oven gt Replace the Aging Rate and Warmup specifiations with the following Long Term Aging Rate A 5x 107 per day after 24 hour warm up when l oscillator off time was less than 24 hours 2 oscillator aging rate was 5 x 107 per day prior to T off B 5x 10 per day in less than 30 days of continuous operation for off time greater than 24 hours C 1x 10 per year for continuous operation Warmup Within 5 x 107 of final value see below 10 min after turn on when 1 oscillator is operated in a
120. and servicing of this instrument is located in appropriate sections of this manual including cautions and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and keep the instrument in safe condition 1 1 HP 5334A B General Information 1 10 General 1 11 The HP 5334A B and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation Before applying power verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed Refer to Section Il Installation Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications Apply to both HP 5334A and B unless otherwise noted INPUT CHARACTERISTICS CHANNEL A and CHANNEL B Range dc coupied 0 to 100 MHz ac coupled 1 Mf 30 Hz to 100 MHz 500 1 MHz to 100 MHz Sensitivity 15 mV rms sine wave to 20 MHz 35 mV rms sine wave to 100 MHz 100 mV peak to peak at a minimum pulse width of 5 ns Sensitivity can be continuously varied to 150 mV rms NOMINAL using the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control in sensitivity mode In this mode trigger levels are automatically set to OV NOMINAL Dynamic Range X1 45 mV to 5V peak to peak to 20 MHz 100 mV to 2 5V peak to peak to 100 MHz Signal Operating Range DC 5V dc iX ATTNi1 Trigger Level Range Manual Auto Trigger OFF Continuously adjust able over 5 1V displayed by Read Levels in 20 mV steps In X10 51V displayed in 200 mV steps Preset OV N
121. ange and polarity depending on the input voltage The sensitivity is 100 uS to 100 mV depending on the range Pressing the DVM function key enables the operation of the Voltage mode 3 79 Pulse Width Measurements 3 80 See Figure 3 54 for details of Pulse Width measurements The HP 5334A B provides automatic Pulse Width measurements shown in Figure 3 15 through the INPUT A connector for repetitive signals over a pulse width range of 5 nanoseconds to 10 milliseconds Pulse Width measurements are specified for trigger levels as 50 amplitude of the input signal in Table 1 1 Pressing the the 100 GATE AVERAGE key increases the number of digits of resolution displayed CHANNEL A __ 1 I 1 1 een SLOPE X f LEVEL PULSE WIDTH MEASURED Figure 3 15 Pulse Width Measurement 3 81 Pulse Width measurements are made by connecting a signal to INPUT A pressing the PULSE WIDTH A function key and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning AUTO TRIG is automatically set on to trigger at the 50 point of the signal The channel A SLOPE key position determines whether positive or negative pulse width measurements will be made Measurements are continuously displayed from gate cycle to gate cycle Actual gate time is controlled by the input pulse width The gate time setting controls the time between measurements 3 82 Rise Fall Time Measurements 3 83 See Figure 3 55 for details of Rise Fall Tim
122. annel A i Press RATIO A B function key and press AUTO TRIG off Press AC IDC 500 Z 1MQ SLOPE and X10 X1 ATTN keys to appropriate positions Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position LED ON rotate TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls fully ccw This setsthe trigger level at 0 volts nominally and sensitivity to minimum Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement is displayed Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to ratio measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Preset conditions on initial selection of RATIO A B Lockout conditions during RATIO mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SETTING HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE OFF 100 GATE AVERAGE EXT ARM SELECT MATH DISABLE no lockout no lockout no lockout no lockout OFF OFF ON Figure 3 52 Ratio A B Measurements xv 8o vi a God sore a 4A p a rye oe up wa HP 5334A B Operation and Programming NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to T
123. ass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 4 HP 5334A B Performance Tests What Checked The interpolators which provide the accuracy of the frequency count are tested Defective interpolators may cause the reading to vary up to 100 Hz For Failure Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The interpolators are part of the Measurement Block Other blocks involved here are the Input Amplifier DAC Executive Front Panel and Time Base Power Supply blocks 4 20 INPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONING CHECK Description Thisseries of checks performs a functional test ofthe front panel relays and circuitry associated with those relays Procedure 1 Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel A Input 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows 4 6 Reinitialize the 5334A B AUTO FRIG merana penc UE Ra x E Y m porte dk ora Aca OFF CONCA Vantage ep or REB oe ee ira uta ON CHAN lt A and 850 eet EE REN thsi res EX n E ON GATE TIME koreera oa iw Re RSEN a TOO RETE 1 Second Adjust both TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls clockwise until trigger lights just go off Set the HP 5334A B as follows COMA tides lassie sence tinea sweatin Saas eee ee eS OFF CHAN A and B 500 addere veto e aree p ters RR OFF Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 10 000 000 0 MHz 0 2 Hz Channel A trigger light flashing and Channel B light not flashing Set the HP 5334A B as follows CHANA BEI Corso needa dle set C
124. asses device dependent commands and device independent comman ds Device independent commands are defined by the interface standard document and are the same in all instruments These commands are identified by a three letter mnemonic such as GTL which represents Go To Local Device independent commands are sent as encoded bytes on the interface and not as ASCII strings Thus these commands cannot be sent using the OUTPUT statement on the HP 85 However many controllers do incorporate a command of the form SEND7 CMDnnn where nnn is the decimal equivalent to the bit pattern corresponding to a particular device independent command detailed description of Device independent Commands is given in paragraph 3 289 3 288 Device dependent commands are unique to the instrument and are defined by the instrument designer They are normally sent to an instrument as ASCH strings A detailed description of Device Dependent Commands begins in paragraph 3 306 3 289 Device Independent Commands 3 290 A list of supported device independent command mnemonics and the full name of each command is provided in Table 3 8 The following paragraph include a description ofthe function of each command ee u ig dier 1 Toi hi ee MN eee vot K Wes el ku tL gd Ld ee Eee ane tAPMATHIMS XM OE Stet DONORUM p TT iA MNEMONICS COMMAND NAME HP 5334A B Operation and
125. asured with 500 termination X10 attenuator enabled when either peak is greater than z 5 1V OR difference between maximum and minimum peaks exceeds 5 1V X1 attenuator enabled when maximum and minimum peak amplitudes are less than 4 6V AND dif ference between maximum and minimum peaks is less than 4 4V AUTO TRIGGER DC Coupled 100 Hz to 100 MHz AC Coupled 1 MO 100 Hz to 100 MHz 50 0 1 MHz to 100 MHz Minimum Amplitude 100 mV rms sine wave 280 mV peak to peak Trigger Level Accuracy 30 mV iX ATTN For Rise Fall Time 40 mV X ATTNi Auto Trigger is disabled for Totalize Frequency C DVM HP 5334A and Read Trigger Levels 1 3 HP 5334A B General Information Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications Continued flog scale Error Per Point 100 ps 10 ps 1 V ms input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point log scale Graph 3 Input Noise Trigger Error Noise on the input signal affects both the Start and Stop points of ail time interval measurements RISE FALL TIME A Range 30 ns to 10 ms Minimum Amplitude 500 mV peak to peak Dynamic Range 500 mV to 40V peak to peak LSD 1 ns 1100 ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE Resolution LSD Start Trigger Error 3 x Stop Trigger Error 3 1 ns rms Accuracy Resolution Trigger Level Timing Error Trigger Level Setting Error at 10 point 2 z Trigger Level Setting Error at 90 point Timebase Error 2 ns Typical
126. asurements have been displayed will timeout and stop the program as shown EXAMPLE 7 TOTALIZE MEASUREMENTS This program demonstrates the difference between t and T outputs during the Totalize mode The program totalizes counts for approximately 10 seconds During this time four intermediate counts are printed out at 2 4 6 and 8 seconds A final count is printed after the Totalize Stop command is executed at 10 seconds then the process is repeated 3 96 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming LINE 10 Dimension A to 19 characters LINE 20 Send IN TRT commands to 5334A B IN initializes the counter and sets the internal trigger levels to 0 volts TR1 sets the internal trigger level controls on dACS On 5334A only and turns AUTO TRIG off LINE 30 Send RE FN9 commands to 5334A B RE resets the the counter and starts a new measurement FN9 sets counter in Totalize Start mode LINE 40 Sets up loop to read and print out four measurements LINE 50 Wait 2 seconds 2000 ms LINE 60 Read 5334A B measurement into A and print the value of A LINE 70 Go back to LINE 40 and repeat the process until the fourth measurement has been read LINE 80 Wait 2 seconds LINE 90 Send FN8 command to the 5334A B FN8 sets the counter in the Totalize Stop mode LINE 100 Read 5334A B measurement into X and execute lt CR LF gt LINE 110 Print contents of
127. ate the need for attention and can interrupt the current sequence of events The Service Request Mask SM command must be set prior to the condition All SRQ conditions can be masked off disabled by setting SMO if all SRQ conditions are masked off none of the following conditions will PO M Jes HP 5334A B Operation and Programming generate an SRQ Typically SRQ indicates data is ready to transmit and or an error condition exists The counter can send an SRQ to the controller under any or all of the following conditions as defined by the Service Request Mask Data Ready A measurement has been completed and is available for collection Error An Error or Failure condition exists and is displayed Local The instrument is in local operation 3 301 In general the controller can read the counter Status Byte at any time to check selected operating conditions During remote operation you may selectively program the Service Request Mask SMn to identify the conditions which you feel may require service or data collection 3 302 Once SRQ has been sent the controller can identify which condition or conditions caused the Service Request When the Status Byte is read conditions that exist will be set to 1 whether or not they were enabled as a condition to generate SRQ For example with the HP 85 A SPOLL 703 requests the eight bit binary Status Byte and sets the variable A equal to the value of the Status Byte Then i
128. aximum Transition Time 1 us Sensitivity 500 mV peak to peak Signal Operating Range 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc Dynamic Range 500 mV to 10V peak to peak Arm Trigger Level HP 5334A Adjustable from 4V to 4V by rear panel control HP 5334B Fixed ai 1 5V Slope Independent selection of START and STOP ARM siopes or OFF Arm Set up Time Typicaily 20 ns for all measurements except Totalize Typically 100 ns for Totalize Impedancet dc Coupled 1 kf NOMINAL shunted by lt 30 pF Damage Level 15 V idc peak ac FREQUENCY A and FREQUENCY B Range 001 Hz to 100 MHz LSD Or 4n5 y FREQ Gate Time Resolution see Graph 1 Gate Time Accuracy Resolution X Timebase Error 2 PERIOD A Range 10 ns to 10 s ESOO 4ns x PER Gate Time Resolution isee Graph 13 i1 4 X Trigger Error D 4 ns rms X PER Gate Time l tL LSD Accuracy Resolution Timebase Error Ves JF ix Xm J bid HP 5334A B General Information Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications Continued 1 kHz 00 Hz i 0 01 s gate 1 mVrms noise 1 Vpp sine wave i 10 Hz 0 1 s gate 1 mVrms noise 0 1 Vpp sine wave c 1 ANM ME XN DN PROIN CRINE em T E QUT ce PES Error AF log scale mE TL DIM Ur i nes G 0 1 s gate 1 mVrms noise 1 Vpp sine wave 100 uHz TENERE t s gate 100 Vrms noise 1 Vpp sine wave 10 pHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz
129. ble 1 3 Accessory Equipment Supplied DESCRIPTION HP PART NUMBER Detachable Power Cord 229 cm 7 1 2 feet long 8120 1378 Table 1 4 Accessories Available 2 1300 MHz Preamplifiers 10855A Probe Power Supply drives 10855As 1122A Low Pass Filter Kit 10856A Probes 500 MHz Active Probe 1120A Time Interval Probes 5363B 10 1 Divider 10001A Resistive Divider 10020A 1 20 OPTIONS 1 21 The options available for the HP 5334A B Universal Counter are listed and described below Specifications for the options are given in Table 1 1 lf an option is included in the initial order it will be installed at the factory and ready for operation upon receipt ofthe instrument For field installation of Option 010 020 030 5334A only see Note below 050 and 060 refer to Section VI for part ordering information and to Section VIII for installation instructions Both Sections Vl and VIII are part of the Service Manual j i 1 22 The HP 5334B has an Option 700 MATE board The operating and programming information for this option is documented in a separate manual titled HP 5334B OPTION 700 INTERNAL CIIL INTERFACE Operating and Programming Manual HP Part Nu mber 05334 90034 Option Description 010 High Stability Time Base Oven Oscillator 020 1000V Floating Digital Voltmeter Module HP 5334A only 030 1 3 GHz C Channel Input Module 050 Combination Options 020 and 030 HP 5334A only 060 Rear Panel Inputs Channel A
130. cations Description The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity specifications and two different frequency settings Frequencies and conditions tested 80 MHz and 100 MHz dc coupled 1 Megohm 80 MHz and 100 MHz ac coupled 1 Megohm REAR B EE i E a 53354A B 8660A7C UNIVERSAL SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 4 7 Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060 Equipment Signal Generator io ies ere eh Ren ww HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency coc baa d eoe e ERR ARDOR CER o T CRT RV 80 MHz npo rrr ME ECPNDEA 50 mV rms 2 Set the HP 5334A B as foilows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION ozira nonar eet ria FREQ B SENS pour S duct tar tut A EL Ea MEC ON CHAN B IRIGCZSENS control ge cdose alaviewvas oa fully cw 4 23 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 3 Connect 50 Ohm feedthroughs or terminations on the rear panel A and B Inputs 4 Connectthe signal generator to the HP 5334A B front panel Input B as shownin Figure 4 7 5 Repeat the tests of paragraph 4 35 for Channel B and record the measurements on the Performance Test Record Card lines 29 through 32 Begin the tests at the verification of 80 MHz in paragraph 4 35 step 5 Failures If any of these tests fail referto Section V Adjustments paragraph 5 17 and 5 19 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 37 PERIOD A TEST Specification Refer to Table
131. ch input has a selectable impedance of 1 MQ or 500 With 1M impedance the inputis shunted by 60 pF At the higher frequencies the 500 nominal input impedance is usuaily preferred since the inherent shunt capacitance of high impedance inputs rapidly reduces input impedance For the lower frequencies the 1 MQ input impedance may be selected The input impedance becomes 500 kQ in the 1 MA position when COMMON input is enabled shunted by 85 pF maximum In the 500 position the impedance remains 500 for COMMON input 3 37 ATTENUATORS 3 38 Attenuators are used to reduce the amplitude of the input signal and prevent overloading without introducing appreciable phase or frequency distortion Step attenuators with selectable attenuation positions of X1 or X10 are provided in the HP 5334A B For signals that exceed the 5 Vp p dynamic range of the input X10 attenuation reduces the signal by a factor of 10 When X10 attenuation is selected the trigger level reading is multiplied by 10 3 39 Attenuation is automatic when AUTO TRIGGER is selected The X10 attenuator is automatically enabled when the signal exceeds the dynamic range or signal operating range When the signal is within both limits X1 attenuation is enabled Refer to Table 1 1 for exact specif cations on auto attenuation 3 40 DAMAGE LEVEL 3 41 Damage level is the maximum input voltage the counter can withstand without danger of input failure The damage level value varies with input
132. cs of the HP 5334A B are given in Table 1 1 3 13 RANGE 3 14 Range defines the frequency range over which the input amplifier sensitivity is specified The range varies with the selected coupling and input impedance Although the specification states that the input amplifier has a range from dc to 100 MHz the range may be different for measurements in each operating mode Consult the individual RANGE Signal Operating and or Dynamic specifications under the appropriate OPERATING MODE in Table 7 1 3 15 SIGNAL OPERATING RANGE Signal operating range defines the maximum positive and negative voltages within which the peak to peak signal can reliably operate If the signal peaks extend beyond the specified signal operating range as shown Figure 3 2 bottom one or more operating modes may give incorrect results for example frequency miscounting or time interval inaccuracies 3 16 DYNAMIC RANGE Dynamic range is the minimum to maximum allowable peak to peak signal range specified with the trigger level set at midpoint of the input signal and centered within trigger level range The instrument s dynamic range is limited by the input amplifier s linear range of operation If the input signal exceeds this range as shown in Figure 3 2 top the input amplifier may saturate causing transitions of the input to be missed SIGNAL EXCEEDS das em TRIGGER 3 i ORANGE T SIGNAL OPERATING RANGE SIGNAL EXCEEDS SIGNAL OPERATING RANGE SIG
133. ction of aid rear panel feature paragraph m 3 208 Rear Panel Controis and Connectors f Detailed operating procedures for each measurement mode Figures 3 46 through 3 60 3 259 Within each specific measurement mode e g FREQ A PERIOD A a considerable amount of flexibility is present for both the type of input signal and measurement technique The intent of the following figures and text is to provide instructional procedures for each major functional mode These operating guidelines should assist in making the most useful and accurate measurement possible AE HP 5334A B Operation and Programming tle WE 53344 UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD b eom A o 5 Zw E iowa ANKRE NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF for separate inputs COMMON position LED ON for common inputs i Connect signal to INPUT A or INPUT B jack Press corresponding function key FREQ A FREQ 8 Press AC DC 500 Z 1MQ and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position LED ON rotate TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control fully ccw This sets the trigger level at 0 voits nominally and sensitivity to minimum Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement i
134. cy Error i t 10 kHz i H i CUERE MEUS NEN ER ma ee H i i TEHE E cine Aleem ee ee ee ree hy eer ee i i T B 1 month after cal i i i i 100 ra MM J Biased Dada iod apr 100 as i 1B He UNE pem 1905 8 tHe as aT in E 3 aa F 2 100mHz eui i i L 100 3 Oven TE 10 years after ca 3 3 b i i CT H i i H m 10 mHE LT m atl EE MS FRONS o mHz L t9 i 10 ps i 1 mH Wet od eee ie eet en ee i TL ioc ps H i i 100 artz E 4 ae ee L 1190 ts o 19 aB i i H i adiuti dis is 100 Hz f KHz 10 kHz 100 kHz MHz 10 MHz 100 MH2 1 GHz 1600 ns lus 18 3 190 x5 tma H ms 100 ms 18 input Signal Frequency or Time leg scale Graph 2 Timebase Error Crystal environment and aging affects all measurements t Resistance values are measured at dc and capacitance values at 10 MHz This is a systematic error due to differential channel delay imatching Channel A and B which can be eliminated by proper measurement technique i e numerical offset or different cable lengths 100 ps rms using 100 GATE AVERAGE AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENTS These features are specified from 100 Hz to 20 MHz unless noted Minimum width at peak of signal 5 ns Auto Trigger and Auto Attenuation automatically engaged for Rise Fall Time Pulse Width and AC DC Voltage measurements AUTO ATTENUATION Enabled simultaneously with Auto Trigger i Voltage vatues are NOMINAL me
135. d I sea j o HP 5334A B Operation and Programming L precedes Channel A and B lower peak levels O precedes measurements that overflow C precedes calibration data no units See paragraph 3 342 for Totalize output 3 336 MEASUREMENT DATA FIELD The data field consists of a 14 character string The number begins with the sign followed by the digits in descending order of significance The number is right justified within the data field To keep the number of characters consistent within the total string spaces are inserted preceding the sign 3 337 EXPONENT Preceded by an E and the sign the exponent will always be two digits The format of the HP IB output and the display may differ since the HP 1B output is in scientific notation and the display is in engineering notation 3 338 TYPICAL OUTPUT STRINGS The following string illustrates the typical output fora FREQ A measurement of 458 341265 kHz The output data is always followed by a CR carriage return and a LF line feed F sp sp sp 4 58341265E 05 CR LF 3 339 If there is an overflow the measurement is incorrect the following output is sent over the HP 1B unless the counter is in the High Speed Output mode or the measurements is in one of the split display modes 0 9 99999999999E 99 lt CR LF gt 3 340 Three measurement modes have a split display and have a different output format that is best illustrated by an example Tri
136. d 255 although only five bits indicated by are actually used The binary value of n is interpreted as follows BIT DEFINITION WEIGHT Bit 7 Always O oo loans aC ECC S cyl AMEN DES 128 Bit 6 ROS FD TP 64 Bit 5 NG COS atOE oes oe da bea eae s 32 Bit 4 Instrument n Local ioci eher 16 Bit 3 Failure Condition lesse 8 Bit 2 Error Condition iussi EE aa EN A 4 Bit 1 w AUS D racion toren E nes Seger 2 1 Bit 0 Data Ready see note below 3 77 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 78 For example sending the command SM13 will generate a service request SRQ and set Bit 6 RQS after an error or failure condition is generated or when data is ready 8 41 The condition or conditions that caused the service request may be determined by reading the Status Byte NOTE To guarantee SRQ at the end of a measurement use the WAT command Bit 0 Data Ready may not be setat the completion of a measurement if the instrument is not addressed to talk uniess the instrument is in the Wait to be Addressed mode WAT 3 306 Device Dependent Commands 3 307 The counter will accept command strings in either upper or lower case Spaces commas and semicolons between commands are interpreted as command terminators in addition parity bits are ignored Depending upon the controller this can help to speed up programming The following free format command statements will produce identical results
137. d unlistens initializes to an idle state No activity on the bus if n matches the instrument address the instrument becomes a listener The front panel RESET LOCAL key is disabled if the instrument is in remote MLA is the LADn that matches the instrument address MTA is the TADn that matches the instrument address The instrument returns to local front panel operation local lockout is cleared No effect when received by the instrument 3 73 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 74 REN The instrument enters the remote state and is enabled to respond to interface commands when addressed as a listener SDC Ifthe instrument is a listener will cause the same response as DCL SPD Terminates serial polling and returns the instrument to a normal talker state to output device dependent data rather than status information SPE Establishes serial polling and enables the instrument to send the serial poll status byte when addressed to talk TADn lf n matches the instrument address the instrument becomes a talker UNL The instrument is unaddressed and terminates listening A single device cannot be unaddressed without unaddressing all listeners UNT Unaddresses the instrument if currently a talker and terminates talking Addressing another talker on the interface automatically unaddresses any current talker Table 3 9 Meta Messages MESSAGE DESCRIPTION RESPONSE DATA A means to send device dependent comma
138. ddressable The following paragraphs describe the basic programming capability of the HP 5334A B Universal Counter TALK The HP 5334A B can be addressed to Talk by a controller or by entering the TALK ONLY address 50 When addressed as a Talker the HP 5334A B will send data to other devices on the bus This data is the result of the measurement or the next measurement depending on the function selected Also sends calibration data error messages etc LISTEN When addressed as a Listener the instrument will accept any number of commands from a controller on the bus These commands are used to program the instrument operation SERVICE REQUEST SRQ will be generated on the interface whenever an enabled status bit is set The HP 5334A B has the capability to request service asynchronousiy from the controller in charge of the bus See SM command described in Service Request Mask paragraph 3 304 REMOTE LOCAL Normally the HP 5334A B is under front panel local control To program the HP 5334A B it must be placed in Remote Once in Remote programmable functions cannot be affected by the front panel controls The RESET key may be used to manually return to local control only if the Local Lockout LLO is off If Local Lockout is on the RESET key is ignored and the bus command LOCAL must be sent to disable LLO HP 5334A B Operation and Programming PARALLEL POLL The HP 5334A B does not respond to a parallel poll DEVICE CLEAR
139. de of several major components including the microprocessors and related circuitry such as a Executive Measurement and HP IB Microprocessor ROMs and RAMs b Communication between the Executive and HP IB Microprocessors and between the Executive and Measurement Microprocessors C Front Panel Display d The HP IB Address is read from the CMOS RAM and verified e MRC Registers 3 248 When all tests have successfully completed the HP 5334A B will display a PASS message If an ERROR or FAIL message is displayed during the test cycle press the RESET key to clear the display and return the counter to the next test in the Diagnostic Sequence Refer to Error indications paragraph 3 252 and Tables 3 3 and 3 4 3 249 To perform the Diagnostic Sequence cycle the POWER key to STANDBY and back to ON while pressing the RESET key press both these keys simultaneously Hold the RESET key until the dIAG message is displayed Verify during this cycle all front panel display segments and indicators turn ON and OFF momentarily except STANDBY and the A and B INPUT trigger lights as shown in Figure 3 43 The ARM and GATE lights toggle back and forth during the display of the PASS message if all tests have successfully completed The momentary display of the dlAG message is then repeated To exit the Diagnostic JSsnehes recycle the POWER switch to STANDBY and back to ON Figure 3 43 Display Check 3 45 HP 5334A B Operat
140. ding Time Base IN OUT connector to either INPUT or OUTPUT mode When the switch isin the INT internal position the connector is in the Output mode in the EXT external position the connector is in the Input mode to accept an external reference 3 222 HP IB Interface Connector 3 223 The HP IB 24 pin Interface connector is used to convey data and programming information Refer to paragraph 3 260 Remote Programming Via HP 1B for further information 3 224 Arm Trigger Level Control HP 5334A Only 3 225 The ARM TRIGGER LEVEL control allows the adjustment of the arming signal trigger level from 4V to 4V This control simultaneously adjusts the trigger level for both the START ARM and the STOP ARM they cannot be adjusted independently 3 225 Rear Panel INPUT Connectors Option 060 3 227 Front and Rear Panel PARALLEL inputs are provided for Channels A B and Arming This offers the convenience of connecting signals to these inputs through either the front or rear panel Only rear panel input are provided for Channel C and or the DVM for instruments that have one or both of these options BNC connectors are used at the point of entry to connect signals to the corresponding inputs 3 228 All Optional rear panel inputs are used for thesame functional modes of operation as the front panel inputs All signal conditioning gate math memory and function controls for these inputs remain on the front panel 3 229 Option 01
141. e GOSUB 7819 Re DISP E the 53346 B DISP uill Be reset and the status Dyte will be read by the DISP controller 60SUB 8480 REMOTE OUTPUT A 0R GOSUB 8500 GOSUB 8750 GOTO 79760 i CHECKPOINT 13 1 2 Send Error Code 213 G0SUB 78160 R DISP ES an d C4 DISP unrecognizable command code willbe sent to the 5334A B to gener aie an error 5370 56380 6380 5400 5410 5420 S430 5440 8450 6469 5470 B480 5490 55090 5510 6529 6530 5540 6550 6560 6570 6580 5530 5589 BB10 8520 6530 4 60 G0SUB 8480 REMOTE A QUTPUT A ILLEGAL COMMAND CLEAR DISP Verify that the S334A B display shows ERROR 4 0 DISP DISP ES the error l DISP for this illegal command will besent to the controller GOSUB 8480 LOCAL 7 WAIT 3000 E 0 CLEAR DISP The expected value for this error code is 4 REMOTE A l OUTPUT A op TE ENTER DISP DISP The reiurned vaiue for this error code is Ep IF E 4 THEN R R f IF E424 THEN R R Q DISP RISP FS PAUSE CLEAR A GOSUB 8750 tt it BE4G 55560 S550 5570 5589 55530 5700 6710 5720 5738 6749 6750 5756 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP 1B Operational Verification Program Listing Continued CHECKPOINT 14 Igz High Speed Output seid GOSUB 7819 REMOTE A OUTPUT A IN IOBUFFER X8 DISP In this test the 53344 B DISP uill be programmed te output gt f
142. e Each trigger light should turn on then off as the polarity level changes between 100 mV and 100 mV Adjust each control for a setting of 2 54V and then 2 54V Observe These exact settings should be possible with the voltage reading increasing or decreasing in 0 02V steps Set the HP 5334A B as follows SENS RE PONDUS ETE ON Observe Both trigger level settings should display 0 00V Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 2 What checked T In the READ LEVELS mode the Digital to Analog circuitry and the Measurement microcomputer are operating while the Input Amplifier and Multiple Register Counter circuitry are inactive The DAC circuitry and the Measurement Data Bus are operating properly if the 2 54V settings can be obtained if all tests are passed the likelihood is high that the DACs operational amplifier loops the Read Level comparators the analog switches all are DAC circuitry components andthe front panel pots are operating properly HP 5334A B Performance Tests For Failures If any failures are encountered in this test refer to Section VHI of the Service Manual The Digital to Analog Block is a likely candidate as a starting point for troubleshooting Other circuit blocks involved are the Measurement Executive and Front Panel blocks 4 18 RATIO A B Description This test uses the time base oscillator to drive the A and B input amplifier
143. e adjustment procedures 4 29 The procedures were designed to be performed sequentially in order to fully test the HP 5334A B NOTE If the performance tests are to be considered valid the the following conditions must be met a The Universal Counter must have a 30 minute warmup b The reference oscillator must be set to a frequency standard Perform the Reference Oscillator Frequency Adjustment before beginning these tests This is adjust ment 5 15 in Section V ADJUSTMENTS of the Service Manual NOTE The resolution limits specified in the following procedures assume that the test equipment being used is calibrated and operating at its performance limits When this is not the case problems can occur For example noise on an inputsignalto the Counter will result in the display of what seems to be an inaccurate measurement This condition must be considered when observed measurements do not agree with the per formance test limits 4 30 Preliminary Procedure CAUTION Before the Universal Counter is switched on it must be set to the same line voltage as the power source or damage to the instrument may result For details see Power Requirements Line Voltage Selection Power Cable and associated warnings and cautions in Section il of this manual NOTE To avoid confusion each test procedure begins with a RE INITIALIZATION of the instrument This simply means switching the HP 5334A B to STANDBY and then to
144. e higher frequency be applied to Channel A for measurements and displays greater than 1 as shown in Figure 3 27 The GATE TIME sett ng determines the resolution by selecting the number of cycles of the INPUT B signal over which the ratio is measured Increasing the gate time or increasing the signal frequency at INPUT A results in greater resolution of the measurement ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE Figure 3 27 Ratio Measurement Display Band HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 143 PULSE WIDTH A Key 3 144 The PULSE WIDTH A key selects the Pulse Width mode of operation for signals received through Input A AUTO TRIG is automatically enabied to trigger at the 50 point of the input signal AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled in this mode The Pulse Width mode allows measurements of input signals with a minimum pulse width of 5 nanoseconds The A Channel SLOPE control key can beset to measure positive or negative pulses Gate time is controlled by the input pulse width Pressing the 100 GATE AVERAGE key whilein the Pulse Width mode increases the number of digits of resolution displayed as shown in Figure 3 28 ow HORS EENM o ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE 2557 Figure 3 28 Pulse Width Measurement Display 3 145 FREQ B Key 3 146 The FREQ B key selects the Frequency mode of operation for signals received through input B The FREQ B mode allows measurements on frequencies from 1 mHz to 100 MHz When the FREQ B mode is selected a
145. e instrument successfully executes the power up self test routine the front panel displays PASS and then defaults to preset conditions pa Front Panel Preset Conditions p 9 Digit Display deoa Rc dae vrxode sean all dashes E Hz annunciato gt wah cato en RUE Deb ER OE are ute ON PRESET annuncldtal 52 4 vov aks ad EX ARV ON PREQU AU seis ore Ra EC RA X ADR Oa epi ade Ue ids ON AUTO TRIG aimed Ebo E e a pu Qposaidta dus dade ON Channel A and B TRIGGER LEVEL LEDs Flash Alternately s All Other indicators cece POET E MT OFF Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 1 What Checked E 1 The three microcomputers perform a ROM and RAM check i 2 The alternately flashing ARM and GATE annunciators indicate that the Measurement A microcomputer passes the ROM RAM test 3 The Executive microcomputer runs the front panel display check 3 4 The Executive and Measurement micromimputem perform a limited Input Output port check 5 The Measurement microcomputer checks for the presence of a time base oscillator A test of the Multiple Register Counter MRC is made to check for basic operation ka OH 7 A handshake communication test is performed between the Executive and Measurement and the Executive and HP IB microcomputers ixi 8 The Executive microcomputer reads the HP 1B address from the CMOS RAM and displays E it to the front panel i For F
146. e measurements The Rise Fall time mode of operation automatically configures the counter to perform either rise or fall time measurements through the INPUT A connector shown in Figure 3 16 The input is automatically set to COM A and triggering to AUTO TRIG In this mode AUTO TRIG automatically locates the 10 and 90 points of the input signal and sets the trigger levels accordingly RISE TIME is measured when the SLOPE A control is set positive FALL TIME when SLOPE A is set negative For rise and fall time measurements the input signal must be continuous AUTO TRIG and COM A cannot be disabled when the HP 5334A B is operating in the Rise Fall Time mode Actual gate time is controlled by the rise fall time interval Gate time setting determines the time between measurements HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Wr y 992 auto 38 TRIG TRIGGER W 1gz LEVELS SLOPE A RISE FALL SLOPE A Tof TIME TIME TO X Figure 3 16 Rise Fall Time Measurements 3 84 Rise fall time measurements are made by connecting a signal to INPUT A pressing the RISE FALL TIME A function key and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning COM A and AUTO TRIG are automatically set on the SLOPE A key may beset for either RISE TIME or FALL TIME Measurements are continuously displayed from gate cycle to gate cycle Pressing the 100 GATE AVERAGE key increases the number of digits of resolution displayed 3 85 Peak Volta
147. e puil back into normal position and re insert fuse in holders using caution to select correct fuse value Figure 2 1 HP 5334A Voltage Selection with Power Module PC Board HP 5334A B Installation LINE SELECT FUSE 100 120V T7TSOmAT 220 240V 375mAT S0 80Hz60VA MAX SLIDE SWITCHES Figure 2 2 HP 5334B Voltage Selection with Slide Switches 2 18 Power Cable 2 19 The HP 5334A B is shipped with a three wire power cable When the cable is connected to an appropriate ac power source this cable connects the chassis to earth ground The type of power cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Table 2 1 for the part numbers of the power cable and plug configurations available 2 20 HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS 2 21 HP IB Interconnections 22 Interconnections data concerning the rear panel HP IB connector is provided in Figure 2 3 This connector is compatible with the HP 10833A B C D HP IB cables The HP iB system allows interconnection of up to 15 including the controller HP 1B compatible instruments The HP 1B cables have identical piggyback connectors on both ends so that several cables can be connected to a single source without special adapters or switch boxes System components and devices may be connected in virtually any configuration desired There must be of course a path from the desktop computer or other controller to every device operating on the bus As a p
148. e stored Battery power retains data for 60 days typically with the instrument in STANDBY or AC power removed Setups will be stored indefinitely with the power on All 10 storage locations are completely independent Math constants Gate Time Arming and all other front panel key states are included in any stored setup Additionally the Trigger Level or Sensitivity Level settings are digitized and stored Storage register numbers are entered from the keyboard 3 128 Entry begins by enabling the STORE key The key indicator will remain on and ENTRY light will flash indicating an entry is expected A store register prompt will be displayed as shown in Figure 3 23 An entry is completed by pressing one of the numeric DATA keys 0 9 at which time the entire front panel setup is stored at the indicated location and the counter returns to the previous mode of operation eer PRESET ARM GATE Figure 3 23 HP 5334A STORE ENTRY Mode Display HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 22 3 129 Each time the STORE key is pressed it toggles on or off When the STORE ENTRY mode is enabled only the STORE RESET LOCAL and numeric data keys in the FU NCTION DATA group are operational All other front panel keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed If STORE or RESET LOCAL is pressed while in the STORE ENTRY mode the entry mode will be exited the counter will return to the previous mode of operation and the fron
149. e time will be set at 300 milliseconds math offset value will be set at 0 normalize value at 1 the input A and input B trigger levels will be set at 0 volts and the internal trigger sensitivity levels will be OFF dACS OFF 5334A only LINE 10 Clear the HP 85 display LINE 20 Clear device at address 03 LINE 30 Send ID command to device at address 03 The ID command requests the instrument to return its identification the 5334A B will return the string HP 5334A CR LF LINE 40 Read 5334A B ID response into A LINE 50 Send contents of A to HP 85 screen LINE 60 Send contents of A to HP 85 printer LINE 70 Set 5334A B to initialized state LINE 80 End program execution 3 92 qe AX oii ns opi pee p bs ut e bx i Bode d EXAMPLE 2 SENDING MEASUREMENTS TO THE CONTROLLER HP 5334A B Operation and Programming This program displays each measurement sent to the controller The program clears the HP 85 screen initializes the HP 5334A B to a known state sets the inputs to common and selects the Time Interval Delay mode of operation The variable X is dimensioned to 19 characters to accommodate the measurement output string The next triggered measurement is read into X then displayed on the HP 85 screen The program then repeats reading and displaying measurements LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 LINE 70 EXAMPL
150. e toggled on or off using the DISABLE key Offset and Normalize may be used independently or together as follows Display Measurement Normalize Offset Entry Range 1 X 10 10 to 9 99999999999 X 109 At power up Offset 0 and Normalize 1 GENERAL TIMEBASE Standard Crystal Frequency 10 MHz Aging Rate 3 x 10 7 per month Temperature 5 x 10 8 0 to 50 C Line Voltage 1 x 10 7 for 10 change High Stability Crystak See Option 010 External Input Rear panel BNC accepts 10 MHz 500 mV to 5V rms into 1 k NOMINAL shunted by 20 pF Timebase Output 10 MHz gt 500 mV rms sine wave into 500 via rear panel i GATE TIME Range ms to 99 999 seconds in 1 ms increments Automatically set to 300 ms at power up LSD 1 ms l Resolution LSD Accuracy 100 us 0 05 x GATE TIME up to one period of input signal TIME BETWEEN MEASUREMENTS Auto Trigger on 1s NOMINAL Auto Trigger off 80 ms NOMINAL 100 GATE AVERAGE 100 gates accumulated and average displayed This adds an additional digit of resolution It can be used with all functions except Totalize DVM iHP 5334A 1 and Read Leveis SINGLE CYCLE When enabled one measurement is taken with each push of RESET key amp xu joe wa ee 0 ab C HP 5334A B General information Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications Continued MEMORY HP 5334A only Ten measurement set ups including trigger levels may be stored in mem
151. e trigger lights Figure 3 18 intermediate Power up Display 3 90 Any failures during the power up cycle will produce a display of a numbered error or fail message Fail messages generally indicate a hardware failure within the HP 5334A B and error messages indicate the user has attempted a disallowed operation or key sequence If an error 5 0X through 5 2 or a failed message is displayed pressing the RESET key will clear the display and return the counter to the next test in the power up sequence Refer to Error Indications paragraph 3 252 and Table 3 3 and 3 4 3 91 After the power up sequence the counter will initialize itself Ail gate math memory 5334A only and input signal conditioning keys will be off the function will be FREQ A with AUTO TRIG and auto attenuation on gate time setting will be 300 milliseconds math offset value will be set at 0 and normalize value at 1 The trigger levels are set automatically according to the input signals and the internal control of trigger and sensitivity levels is disabled dACS OFF 5334A only If you are operating an HP 5334A then refer to paragraphs 3 170 through 3 177 for HP 5334A B Operation and Programming information regarding the DACs Various aspects of the performance of the HP 5334A B are tested dynamically during normal operation of the instrument as describe below a In most cases whenever two front panel keys are pressed simultaneously Error 3 0 is display
152. e40u9J4 wou Ao64unoo eurs v euueu spane J4e881 4 S3965e4d pue si86A9 X1IAI1ISUes Ssuunzes g dsp sa9e 2 4ueueJnseseu MBU gevy reuueuo Aeidstp o4 sue4siBeA e qe3snfpe s329 eS NO Aey SNIS sS34 348s o4sB sqae4seJ4 Ady 1v2001 13S3M pexoeis s oJ4uoo ex S7T3A31 QV3W o44uoo 9 9 sues 4eBBra4 eU4ueqUT sea3votpul Aay usse jo 49 eu OF pejege Q31 13S3H8d epou Aa4ue w9p UT seuseij BuraeBBira4 pue o44uoo s n rea Aujyus eroeds yuo oOraeunu of Q31 AHLIN3 Sn493s 2 89 pue suoi43eJedo uisu 4ndu i uouuoo wo e4veuedes Burjdnoo poubisseeu ode suot4ounj Aay sepou ShiT e1S Bi dH 1ueueunseau JO SPUN 9j9 oIDurI eouPpedu uor39Due43 e se uons Kagus e4ep Butung spew 4ueus nseeul SuCoLTBTOUNUUY uor43e30u BuraeeutSue ut peuot4ipuoo st RuBts 4ndu eu Moy yoRe ZO UuOoIi329jes UOT ZOUN ued Aay UMOUS Pep 4ueusJns9eu UYIM 4ueuodxe snid eurude4ep S OuzUCS pue S e INdNI euo ept oad sAsy vIVO NOILONn3 ess guru 418rp g sepr Aoud gidsrp otuewnn Suiuureido44 pue uonpJedo S8 Vrt S dH 6 o8eq aos SHOIO3INNOO ANY SHOLVOIONI SYONINOO s3HniVii TINVd INO S1O DBUUOD PUE SfOsUOD s94n3 93 joued say Op g DINI 6 aunSiy AL eatZoOedseu 4nduJ ao 4nd4ngo o4 eseg eut syzes 4nd4no 4nduti ong eBe410 BUT eye radoadde uo414S Sseappy BI dH USPZIMSG PUXA PULU 4nd4ng 4nduT asteg eut SYOSL S SSYOLIMS eptis 4o3o9uuoj Bi dH Tpy eseg eut n 4epioH esn guchen LV4OS2 A0Zi OO l 3Snd 3 i
153. ecial Functions ec cece ee ee eens 3 80 343339 Oulput Formats iss daesqies e Cam ERAN ERERUEVM PEN SS RE 3 84 3 344 High Speed Output Data 20 eee cee eee etree eens 3 86 35352 Error Handing rete Seo y ove Payne ERU RR E oS REN paces 3 87 3 357 Preset and Disallowed Conditions le eere 3 88 3 359 Programming Examples 424240 seven Swed eR PEOPLE eee HE E bc 3 91 HP 5334A B Table of Contents vi Section iV TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Title PERFORMANCE TESTS iu dade dned cadens nak da dee RA I OI TREES 4 1 Introductloli ooectiaexcsee e Eoo pii ee o oes BNE ERO e o ed 4 3 Equipment Required PEER errr eruta sium in re tes 4 5 Operational Verification Performance Test Record piss eme 4 7 Calibration Cycle esee hmmm nnn 4 10 Test Procedures veces AE E E pis suc ine f dat ads 4 12 Operational Verification Tests 1 06 cece cece eee nn 4 15 Preliminary Procedure cece reece center nnn 4 16 Power Up Self Test Diagnostic Mode 6 cece ene e creer n 4 17 Read Levels ck wi a ves cree EES rer e eR ao e AI THESE 4 10 Ratio ALB uncut qe leu yx seca ens hanes ena eRe ind sts rates 4 19 Frequency 00 cee cece eee erence ete e ene ae aces nre 4 20 Input Signal Conditioning Check 2 0 0 6 eee eee ener nn 6 42 NASB pecetsbebobheudeee MOM PEU EE T 4 22 Auto Trigger oc cece eee rece hmm nnn 4 23 CMOS RAM HP 5334A Only cece cc eee cence een nnes ee 4 24
154. ed If one key sticks and another is pressed it will be detected immediately b If either the Measurement or HP IB microprocessor stops operating it will be detected whenever the counter attempts a data transfer and the appropriate error message will be sent to the display immediately c If the Front Panel is inoperative an error message can be obtained via HP 1B d The CMOS RAM is checked whenever a STORE or a RECALL operation is performed Refer to paragraphs 3 126 through 3 134 for further details on STORE and RECALL Note that the CMOS RAM and its STORE RECALL functions are available in the HP 5334A only e Depending upon the configuration of the instrument if the oscillator stops operating the display will either freeze until another key is pressed which causesthe message NO OSC to be displayed or this message will be displayed immediately a 3 92 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS 3 93 Figure 3 38 shows the front panel controls indicators and connectors Each of the main sections is described in general terms Each control indicator and connector is described in E complete detail in the following paragraphs 3 94 POWER STANDBY ON Key 3 95 When the POWER switch is in the ON position power is supplied to the entire instrument The STANDBY position removes normal operating power to the instrument butsupplies power for the Option 010 high stability oscillator oven to maintain a constant tempe
155. ed as determined by the START STOP ARM status b When the EXT ARM SELECT key is ON and the ARM ENTRY mode is enabled 1 The key indicator remains ON 2 The counter displays St for start arm SP for stop arm and the current start stop arm states see Figure 3 35 3 The ENTRY light flashes indicating the arming states may be changed see Figure 3 35 NOTE Figure 3 35 shows the EXT ARM SELECT entry mode display with the START ARM set negative and the STOP ARM set positive 4 f neither state is changed pressing the EXT ARM SELECT key will keep the displayed states in memory 5334A only and return the counter to the previous mode of operation c During the ARM ENTRY mode 1 The arming states are represented as follows indicates arming is off 7 indicates arming set on negative slope J indicates arming set on positive slope 3 33 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming _ 3 34 NOTE The various modes of arming are determined by the status of the START ARM and the STOP ARM Refer to Arming Modes Figure 3 36 The Input A SLOPE key controls the START ARM St The Input B SLOPE key controls the STOP ARM SP Pressing either SLOPE key at this time changes the corresponding arming state NOTE Only the EXT ARM SELECT START ARM STOP ARM and RESET LOCAL keys are operational All other front panel keys are non functional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed The
156. ed Conditions eee n HP 5334A B Operational Verification Test Record Card sess HP 5334A B Performance Test Record Card ce eeer rene ener ces HP 5334A B HP IB Verification Test Record Card eene HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing eise nn nn HP 5334A B List of Tables vil HP 5334A B List of Figures vii Figure 1 t 1 k Bm i i 1 Li a m od 6 MO m Qo QU Qo QU QU LU w CO GJ CO QU Q9 roe were 9 Ur WN Ln C Uo UJ 1 d LIST OF FIGURES Title Page Model 5334A B Universal Frequency Counters and Accessories 1 0 HP 5334A Voltage Selection with Power Module PC Board 2 2 HP 53348 Voltage Selection with Slide Switches lees 2 3 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Connection sss 2 6 Simplified Block Diagram of the Reciprocal Counter easan iod pos acid ied 3 2 Invalid Input Signal Conditions 0 0 0 5c cece cece eee eee n 3 3 Valid Input Signal Conditions cceceee reer e seen nn 3 4 Acceptable Peak to Peak Amplitude ccs ene e nee r eee e eee eee 3 4 Insufficient Peak to Peak Amplitude 0 cece cece eee e teen ne 3 5 Trigger Level Set Below Midpoint of Input Signal eee 3 5 Varying the Sensitivity Control Changes the Hysteresis Window 3 6 AC DC Coupling oi sitewide sie OE E Eee dde rbi Va ke perd 3 6 Trigger Level and Actual Trigger Point cece eee ence cere nn 3 7 Trigger Level Con
157. eee eee eee n 4 45 Channel C Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test HP 5334B ses EAS 4 46 HP IB Verification Test c cee rece hh hn Page 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 11 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 16 gun Skah 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 6 3 7 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 LIST OF TABLES Title HP Model 5334A B Specifications se cece eee eee POUR REE ar Differences Between the HP 5334A and HP 5334B sssseeeee Accessory Equipment Supplied 2 0 0 0 cece cece teen n Accessories Available cesse htt Recommended Test Equipment sese Matsa tant qu AC Power Cables Available ccccecsec ec nesses rrt 2 HP 5334A Trigger Sensitivity Level Settings seee reer n Preset and Lockout Conditions ccc cece eee n Error Messages sssese ehh hh hh heme Failure Messages 2 ce ccc cee eee hh Hh hene HP 5334A B HP IB Interface Functions 6 cee ee eee n nnn HP 5334A B Interface Capabilities sees bue ud TC Address Selection lesse ease hehehe hh htt Device Independent Commands seen Meta Messages cece eee ehh ehh hmi heh Meta Messages and Controller Commands see eeeee ees HP 5334A B Status Byte 20 cece cece eee eee hne nnn nnn HP 5334A B Programming Command Set a ssesrerrrerperrererrenr HP IB Preset and Disallow
158. el HP 5334A includes a nonvolatile memory that provides the capability to save and recall up to nine different front panel setups the Model HP 5334B does not contain the nonvolatile memory feature 1 16 Full HP IB programmability is a standard feature of the HP 5334A B Universal Counter All front panel features including gate time trigger levels and sensitivity may be selected via HP IB HP IB provides remote control of programming and data output With the optional Modular Automatic Test Equipment MATE Processor circuit the HP 5334B is allowed to respond to an additional control language called Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL Note thatthe Option 700 MATE circuit is not available with the HP 5334A 1 17 The differences between the HP 5334A and HP 5334B are listed in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Differences Between the HP 5334A and HP 5334B MODEL NUMBER HP 5334A HP 53348 MEMORY STORE RECALL a oo ooo GATE OUTPUT Rear Panel External Arm Trigger Level Adjustment Rear panel External Fine Adjustment for Option 010 Oven Oscillator 10811 OPTIONS X 7 C Channel Probe Power Option 030 C Channel input X X X X X Option 050 Combination of Option 020 DVM and Option 030 C Channel gt lt 1 7 HP 5334A B General Information 1 8 1 18 ACCESSORIES 1 19 Table 1 3 lists accessory equipment supplied with the HP 5334A B Universal Counter and Table 1 4 lists accessories available Ta
159. el displays 0 ns 6 ns 4 Set Channel A to Negative SLOPE 5 oreet hr ewes OFF Channel B to Negative SLOPE 0 ccc e ress eee eees ON Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 50 ns 6 ns 5 Set Channel A to Negative SLOPE esse cree een eee ON Channel B to Negative SLOPE eese OFF Observe The HP 5334A B front panel displays 50 ns 6 ns 4 8 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 6 What Checked Time interval measurement and slope switch operation For Failures Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual In this case the Input Amplifier DAC Measurement Executive Front Panel and Time Base Power Supply blocks are involved 4 22 AUTO TRIGGER Description The Measurement microcomputer sends a signal tothe DAC block and disables the front panel trigger level controls Procedure 1 Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel A Input 2 Setthe HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B GATE TIME oc ene Des ERN ARA ERA Po rn 1 Second Observe The HP 5334A B front pane displays 10 000 000 0 MHz 0 2 Hz and both Channel A and B trigger lights are flashing 3 Rotate Channel A trigger level control Observe There is no effect on the Counter s operation 4 Set AUTO TRIG to OFF Rotate Channel A trigger level control Observe Extreme clockwise and counterclockwise control
160. ements through INPUT A The input is automatically set to COM A and triggering to AUTO TRIG In this mode AUTO TRIG automatically locates the 10 and 90 points of the input signal and sets the trigger levels accordingly Rise Fall Time measure ments require a per odic signal AUTO TRIG and COM A cannot be disabled when the HP 5334A B is operating in the Rise Fall Time mode Gate time is controlled by the rise fall time interval 3 152 FREQ C Key 3 153 The FREQ C key selects the frequency mode of operation for signals received through INPUT C Operation in the FREQ C mode requires the Option 030 Channel C input module and allows measurements on frequencies from 90 MHz to 1 3 GHz INPUT C prescales signals by a factor of 20 however there is no loss of resolution When the FREQ C mode is selected the Channel A and B INPUT section is disabled Measurements through INPUT C respondto all other controls the same as FREQ A measurements 3 154 T l A B DELAY Key 3 155 The T I A B DELAY key selects the Time Interval mode of operation measuring elapsed time between a Start signal on INPUT A anda Stop signal on INPUT B Triggering of the Stop signal is DELAYED for a period of time determined by the Gate Time Delay setting Potential Stop events are ignored during the specified delay 3 156 TOT START A Key 3 157 The TOT START A key selects the Totalize mode of operation and starts a continuous count and display of the number of even
161. enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to time interval measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 NOTE The first measurement is not displayed until the gate time delay has elapsed PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Ds PRY NU Lockout conditions during TIME Preset conditions on initial selection of T I A B INTERVAL mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT MODE SETTING HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE no lockout EXT ARM SELECT no lockout MATH DISABLE no lockout Figure 3 49 Time Interval Measurements 3 55 HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming CRX e i For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and an amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 l 1 Press POWER switch to ON position ES 2 If Start and Stop signals are from separate sources connect Start signal to INPUT A jack Stop signal to INPUT B Ey jack and press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF If Start and Stop signals are from a common source connect signal to INPUT jack and press COM A key to COMMON position LED ON a Press T i A gt B DELAY function key and press AUTO TRIG off E 4 Press AC DC 500 Z 1MQ SLOPE and X10 ATTN keys to appropriate positions l NOTE E When the COM A key is in COMMON LED ON only the A CHANNEL AC DC and 500 Z 1M0 keys are effective However
162. ency NOTE The STOP ARM can be turned off allowing thegatetime controi to arm the stop if the appropriate pulse width cannot be generated by the arming signal source 3 51 HOW TO MAKE MEASUREMENTS 3 52 The following paragraphs describe how the counter performs in each of thefollowing ten measurement modes Frequency Period Time Interval Time Interval Delay Ratio Totalize Voltage Option 020 HP 5334A only Pulse Width Rise Fall Time Peak Voltage e e o 9 o0 6 9 9 3 53 Foreach measurement mode of the counter Range Least Significant Digit displayed LSD displayed Resolution and Accuracy are described and specified in Table 1 1 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 54 Frequency Measurements 3 55 See Figures 3 46 and 3 47 for details of Frequency measurements The HP 5334A B makes frequency measurements on input signals within the ranges of 1 mHz to 100 MHz and 90 MHzto 1 3 GHz Input signals up to 100 MHz are received through standard input Channels A and or B Higher frequencies 90 MHz to 1 3 are measured through Option 030 Channel C input 3 56 Frequency measurements are made by connecting a signal to one of the inputs pressing the corresponding function key i e FREQ A FREQ B FREQ C and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning For low amplitude signals on inputs and B the sensitivity mode may be enabled by pressing the SENS key on In this mode the trigger leve
163. ency A B and C Period A Time interval A to B Ratio A B Totalize A Rise Fall Time A Pulse Width A Read Levels A and B AC DC Voltage and Trigger Programmable Controls Channei A and B Trigger Level Auto Trigger Coupling Trigger Slope Impedance Attenuator Common External Arm External Arm Select Slope Generali Gate Time Maximum Data Output Rate 2 5 readings second CHL Operating Codes FNC SET SRX SRN INX FTH CLS OPN RST CNF IST STA GAL MATE interface Standard 2806763 Rev B i Since the HP 58348 input channels are always internally connected the OPN and CLS codes are accepted but no action is taken DEFINITIONS D LSD Unit value of Least Significant Digit Calculations should be rounded to the nearest decade lie 5 Hz becomes 10 Hz and 4 ns becomes 1 ns LSD Displayed There is a 9 digit mantissa maximum for the front panel display If truncation is required the most significant digits are displayed Up to a 12 digit mantissa is available over HP iB Timebase Error Maximum fractional frequency change in timebase frequency due to all errors e g aging temp erature line voltage etc multiplied by the measurement result see Graph 21 Trigger Error isee Graph 3 lei teg vei n seconds rms Where e Effective rms noise of counters input channel 250 uV TYPICAL en rms noise of the input signal for a 100 MHz bandwidth Trigger Level Timing Error see
164. enter attach tag indicating type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Use strong shipping container A double wall carton made of 2 4 MPa 350 psi test material is adequate c Use alayer of shock absorbing material 70 to 100 mm 3 to 4 inch thick arou nd all sides of the instrument to provide firm cushioning and prevent movement inside container Protect control panel with cardboard d Seal shipping container securely e Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling In any correspondence refer to instrument by model number and fuil serial number ia i 4 amp na CABLE HP PLUG TYPE PARTNO 8120 1351 8120 1703 8120 1369 8120 0696 8120 1689 8120 1692 8120 1348 8120 1398 8120 1754 8120 1378 8120 1521 8120 1676 8120 2104 8120 0698 8120 2956 8120 2957 Table 2 1 AC Power Cables Available CABLE PLUG DESCRIPTION LENGTH INCHES Straight B51363A Mint Gray 90 Mint Gray Straight NZSS198 ASC112 909 Straight CEE7 Y11 Mint Gray 90 Mint Gray Straight NEMAS 15P 909 Straight NEMAS 15P Straight NEMAS 15P Jade Gray 90 Jade Gray Straight NEMAS 15P Straight SEV1011 1959 24507 Type 12 Straight NEMA6 15P Straight DHCK 107 909 CD Check Digit refer to Section VI Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for complete cable inc
165. entry mode will be exited the counter will return to the previous mode of operation and the front panel setup will not be recalled To recall a front panel setup press the RECALL key then one of the numeric DATA keys 0 9 Refer to Figure 3 24 for the RECALL ENTRY mode display Figure 3 24 HP 5334A RECALL ENTRY Mode Display 3 133 When the RECALL key is on pressing the decimal point will display the HP 5334A HP iB address and enable the ADDRESS ENTRY mode The HP IB address may be changed at this time Refer to paragraph 3 282 Setting the HP 5334A Address for further instructions Pressing the RESET LOCAL key will exit the ADDRESS ENTRY mode without changing the current address A ose a a We 9 EA d 2 sow x Wei net HP 5334A B Operation and Programming setting During the ADDRESS ENTRY mode only the STORE RECALL RESET LOCAL and numeric DATA keys in the FUNCTION DATA group are operational All other front panel keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed 3 134 When the RECALL ENTRY mode is enabled pressing the CHS EEX key will display the current DACS setting ON or OFF and enable the DACS ENTRY mode shown in Figure 3 25 Pressing the CHS EEX key again will display the alternate DACS setting Each time the CHS EEX key is pressed the display wiil alternate between dACS On or dACS OFF The DACS setting may be changed at this time by pressing the STORE key when the de
166. erate a count For example the peak to peak amplitude is insufficient or the trigger level is set above or below the midpoint of the input signal as shown in Figures 3 5 and 3 6 UPPER HYSTERESIS LEVEL PEAK TO PEAK LLL TRIGGER SENSITIVITY LEVEL C7 LOWER zr Reve INPUT SIGNAL TO COUNTER Signal will not generate a count Figure 3 5 Insufficient Peak to Peak Amplitude UPPER HYSTERESIS LEVEL PEAK TO PEAK us _ TRIGGER SENSITIVITY LEVEL LOWER HYSTERESIS V REPE INPUT SIGNAL TO COUNTER Signal wil not generate a count Figure 3 6 Trigger Level Set Below Midpoint of Input Signal 3 21 The sensitivity specification is given in terms of volts rms for applications that involve measuring a sine wave signal though it should be noted that a different waveform with the same rms voltage may not trigger a count 3 22 Sincethe counter input does not respond to the rms value of the waveform but only to the peak to peak value the sensitivity specification is also given for volts peak to peak with a minimum pulse width 3 5 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 23 The sensitivity of the HP 5334A B can be varied continuously by adjusting the sensitivity control In the SENSITIVITY mode the trigger level is preset at zero volts nominal Note at minimum sensitivity the hysteresis window is increased requiring a larger peak to peak voltage to generate a count as shown in Figure 3 7 Optimum sensitivity de
167. erator as follows FrequefiCy c vssves s Re QUEE ae RUE EE E ER KA das 200 MHz Amplitude 5 4 Noten 258 aieboes ERE NN Apod ls opi 13 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator VERIFY The Counter displays 200 0 MHz 3 Hz 6 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 54 7 Set the signal generator as follows Irequeriy 22 53 cone Ue pat teres ee ded 1000 MHz Amplitude secco taha ue hu apex d ieee a dures 0 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude will provide 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator VERIFY The Counter displays 1000 MHz 20 Hz 8 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 55 9 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency itch pain d cea Mi tages Gaels Oe 2000 MHz Amol tides face codditng eae ee RARI Rt Ea a 0 5 dBm 4 36 lado Lia PER zd us d gape pa PERE pa yet 8 gd EOE o SEM Aus REEVE E BESO BG ORTES Rn KNUUSUNUUp pad gus Ek IIIS TORN NOTE This amplitude provides 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator VERIFY The Counter displays 2000 MHz 20 Hz 10 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 56 Failure Perform Section V Adjustments HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 37 HP 5334A B Performance Tests This page intentionally left blank 4 38 HP 5334A B Performance Tests
168. es of the HP 5334A B Universal Counter The examples are written for the HP 85 controller A summary ofthe program operation and a line by line description are provided for each example 3 361 The examples listed in this section assume an HP 5334A B address setting 03 The counter Is addressed to either talk or listen by using the code 703 where 7 is the interface select code and 03 is the HP 5334A B address The command sent with the address determines whether the counter will talk or listen such as with the HP 85 OUTPUT 703 addresses the counter to listen and ENTER 703 addresses the counter to talk The ASCII characters for the same address settings are C for a talk address and for a listen address The ASCII characters are used if the controller is a HP 9830A calculator or when the cmd statement is used with the 9825 A B l NOTE HP 5334B WITH OPTION 700 MATE ONLY SELECTING THE PROGRAMMING MODE Option 700 allows the HP 5334B to respond to an additional control language called Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL The instrument will still respond to its native HP IB programming code but this would only normally be used for troubleshooting and HP IB operational verification The default instruction set for the HP 5334B Option 700 at power up is determined by the setting of a jumper J701 in the Option 700 MATE Processor Block Assembly At J701 short together pins 2 CI
169. esie vem sva xe Re RR TE HP 3325A Procedure 1 Set the function generator as follows Freaueticy mores pd E REY ERR a ens Rowe ORE 10 Hz Amplitude 4x0 exe de poter ER An ERE Ede 15 mV rms Funcion eL waaay a onde ta wn wae ERE wea Ras Sine Wave 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FONCTION 228 edite me Daleed uke uda e ey FREQ A SENS Arnan pedidos tha ae nee Sexo den uoi af i Medd lead ON CHAN A TRIG SENS control lt ic10 8 cer oCP EUR fully cw 3 Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A B Input A using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 2 VERIFY The Counter displays 10 Hz 0 03 Hz 4 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 1 5 Set the function generator as follows Frequency ETIN 20 MHz VERIFY The Counter displays 20 MHz 0 3 Hz 6 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 2 7 Set the function generator as follows FregUe ey eiedeseuqeiue n bus MERO SAC CQ Sn 30 Hz 4 15 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 8 Set the HP 5334A B as follows VERIFY The Counter displays 30 Hz 0 03 Hz 9 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Racard Card line 3 10 Set the function generator as follows frequency oo cece reece eee nee nennen nne 20 MHz VERIFY The Counter displays 20 MHz 0 3 Hz 11 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 4 12 Set the function generator as follows
170. et and Disallowed Conditions Continued MODE PRESET CONDITIONS DISALLOWED CONDITIONS EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT PARAMETER SETTING HP IB i COMMAND HP IB COMMAND RISE FALL SINGLE CYCLE OFF TIME A 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF ENTI EXT ARMING SLOPES OFF XA2 XO2 MATH DISABLE ON MDI AUTO TRIG ON AUT X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG SENS OFF SEO DACS 5334A only OFF TRO COM A ON CO1 INPUT B SLOPE controlled by INPUT A INPUT B COUPLING controlled by INPUT A INPUT B IMPEDANCE controlled by INPUT A FILTER A OFF FIO High Speed Mode OFF HSO Calibration Data disallowed in Rise Fall Time mode NOTE INPUT B SLOPE COUPLING and IMPEDANCE are set to corresponding INPUT A settings via COM A DVM 5334A SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO FN12 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO EXT ARMING SLOPES OFF XA2 XO2 MATH DISABLE ON MDI AUTO TRIG OFF AUO GATE TIME ENTRY 100 ms controlled by DVM High Speed Mode OFF j HSO Calibration Data disallowed in Voltage mode READ SINGLE CYCLE OFF TRIGGER 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO LEVELS EXT ARMING SLOPES OFF XA2 XO2 EN13 MATH DISABLE ON MDI AUTO TRIG OFF AUO GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in TRIG LEVEL High Speed Mode OFF HSO Calibration Data disallowed in Trigger Levels mode SINGLE CYCLE 100 GATE AVERAGE EXT ARMING SLOPES READ PEAKS A FN14 XA2 XO2 PEAKS B MATH DISABLE
171. etermine the number of counts in the stop interpolator and reads the value into D Adds an offset of 256 if C C3 ST ccc is a negative number between 5 and 256 Adds an offset of 256 if D C1 SP aaa is a negative number between 5 and 256 Calculates T corrected using the equation shown in paragraph 3 262 and reads the value into T Calculates Frequency using the equation shown in paragraph 3 262 and reads the value into X subscript J Return to LINE 110 and repeat the entire process until the last measurement has been calculated Sets up loop to printout 140 frequency measurements Print the number 1 1 and the value of each measurement X J using the format D DDDDDe in LINE 330 Output the measurement number followed by 2 spaces FREQUENCY followed by the value of X J and Hz Return to LINE 310 and repeat process until the last measurement has been printed out End program execution the program produces a printout similar to the following 3 101 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 102 This page intentionally left blank a gt i be as aes HP 5334A B Performance Tests SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 The procedures in this section provide three groups of tests to check for proper operation of the HP 5334A B Universal Counter The first is a quick method of verifying the basic functioning of the counter when its normal operation is
172. evels are read 4100 PAUSE 4110 WATT 1000 4120 CLEAR 4130 OUTPUT A FNIZ 4140 ENTER A LS 4150 DISP Trigger levels read are 4160 DISP L 4170 DISP 4180 DISP FS 4180 PAUSE 4200 WAIT 1000 42180 QUTPUT A IN 4220 GOTO 7950 4230 4240 CHECKPOINT 7 4250 I z GATE TIME 4250 527 4270 GOSUB 7810 4280 DISP ES verify that 4280 DISP the SINGLE CYCLE and 1 GATE 4500 DISP AVERAGE display annunciators light A tone will sound 4310 DISP to mark the function change 4320 PAUSE 435330 REMOTE A 4540 OUTPUT A 3 651 4350 GOSUB 8540 4350 QUTPUT A GSO GUI 4370 GOSUB B540 4380 CLEAR 43580 DISP Verify that the GATE TIME is setto 1 230 seconds by pressing GATE TIME 4400 OUTPUT A GUO GAI 23 4418 LOCAL A 4420 GOTO 7310 A43Q 444Q CHECKPOINT 8 4450 I External Arming 4462 S 8 4470 GOSUB 781 4480 R 449 DISP 4500 DISP Press EXT ARM SELECT on the 533465 8 Verify that the front 4510 DISP panel reads 5t SP 4520 DISP 4530 REMOTE A 4540 OUTPUT A 3 XA2 XOZ 4550 LOCAL A 4550 DISP FS 4570 PAUSE 4580 CLEAR 4580 REMOTE A ELI EG 4 56 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued The S354A B will now be pro grammed for POSITIVE external stari and stop arm gt i 550 DISP Press EXT ARM SELE to verify this 4640 REMOTE A 4550 SUTPUT A XA XO Last
173. f outputting some frequency from 90 MHz to 1300 MHz Procedure 1 Set the signal source as follows PICQUENEY 2653032 EU p EX RC Eaa 90 to 1300 MHz Amplitude DP RT 300 mV rms 2 5 dBm 2 Set the HP 5334A as follows Reinitialize the 5334A a5 eepro ME FREQ 3 Connect the signal source to the HP 5334A Input C 4 Adjust the Channel C Sensitivity control as needed to cause the Counter to gate and display a stable reading Observe The HP 5334A front panel displays the generated frequency Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 10 What Checked Basic operation of the Channel C option For Failures Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual The Channel C Measurement Executive and Front Panel blocks are involved here 4 26 CHANNEL C Options 030 HP 5334B This operational check is for HP 5334B s containing Option 030 Description The Channel C option is checked by Smp measuring meguengy within its range of 90 MHz to 1300 MHz Equipment A dul source capable of outputting some frequency from 90 MHz to 1300 MHz Procedure 1 Set the signal source as follows ETEqUerC y oso ot iu dei dvo du zuxded deas 90 to 1300 MHz Amplitude SUA Lift o2 300 mV rms 42 5 dBm 2 Set the HP 5334B as follows Reinitialize the 5334B FUNCTION cicoreedua Song adnee hale e Suskedaiatoie FREQ C 3 Connect the signal source to the HP 5334B Input C Observe The HP 5334
174. f the statement DISP A is executed the HP 85 will display the Status Byte The number returned will be a decimal equivalent to the sum of the different status bits that have been set as shown in Table 3 11 With the HP 9825A B rds 703 A requests the Status Byte and dsp A sends the status to the HP 9825A B display 3 303 For example the instrument sends a request for service SRQ and reading the Status Byte returned a value of 81 This 64 16 1781 signifies the RQS FLAG is set the instrument is in local operation and data is ready The bits of the Status Byte are set regardless of the Service Request Mask However if a bit is masked off it will not generate an SRQ Table 3 11 HP 5334A B Status Byte w pe p p om m m i 0 FLAG OSC 0 READY 1 ff 17 3 304 Service Request Mask 3 305 Upon receipt of the Service Request Mask Command SMn Command the instrument will load the binary value of n into the service request mask register The SRQ line RQS bit will be set true ONLY if a bit in the status byte becomes true and the corresponding bit set in the service request mask Setting bit 6 RQS by itself SM64 is equivalent to SM0 Sending the command SM0 masks off or disables all SRQ conditions To specify the service request mask send the SM command followed by a decimal number representative of the binary sum of the bits you want enabled You may send any number between 0 an
175. ge Measurements 3 86 See Figures 3 58 and 3 59 for details of Peak Voltage measurements The HP 5334A B measures peak voltages of periodic signals received through input Channels A and or B and positive and negative dc voltage levels Peak Voltage measurements are specified Table 1 1 with AUTO TRIG on over a frequency range of 100 Hz to 20 MHz The measurement range is 40V for positive and negative peaks Auto attenuation automatically enables X10 ATTN when either peak exceeds 5 1V or when the difference between the upper and lower peaks is greater than 5 1V Upper and lower peaks of INPUT A or INPUT B are displayed when the HP 5334A B is operating in the Peak Voltage mode 3 87 ThePeak Voltage mode is enabled with the READ LEVELS function key Pressing the READ LEVELS key once displaysthe trigger levels of the A leftthree digits and B rightthree digits input channels Pressing the READ LEVELS key twice displays the upper left three digits and lower right three digits peak levels of the INPUT A signal shown in Figure 3 17 To display the upper and lower peaks of the INPUT B signal press the READ LEVELS key a third time a fourth time exits the Peak Voltage mode and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation DC voltage measurements are made in the same manner as the ac peak to peak measurements see Table 1 1 Specifications for maximum dc voltage except that the input dc voltage reading will be displayed twice
176. gger Levels A 2 30 B 2 00 lt CR LF gt Peaks A Peaks B H 40 4 L 2 1 lt CR LF gt 3 341 Inthe case of an overflow in Peaks A or Peaks B Trigger Levels cannot havean overflow the format will be 07 9999999 0 9999999 CR LF 3 342 TOTALIZE OUTPUT When data is output in the Totalize mode the T and the t usually represent TOT Stop and TOT Start respectively The t indicates an interim count or subtotal and T indicates a final count When totalizing is stopped FN8 a final count is output Additional events in the inputsignal will not continue the count unless totalizing is restarted with the TOT Start command FN9 An illustration of the totalize output is given in programming examples paragraph 3 359 Note in the talk only mode only the final count T is output 3 343 f external arming is enabled it is possible to stop counting in the TOT Start mode or to continue counting in the TOT Stop mode When external arming is used the TOT Stop command may not stop the count The stop arm signal will generate the T count Therefore a final count T may be output while the counter is still in the TOT Start mode and interim counts t may be output in the TOT Stop mode HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 86 3 344 High Speed Output Data 3 345 When the HP 5334A B makes frequency measurement during normal operation the counter s main gate opens synchronously with the input sign
177. h key 3 137 FREQ A Key 3 138 The FREQ A key selects the Frequency mode of operation for signals received through Input A The FREQ A mode allows measurements on frequencies from 1 mHz to 100 MHz On power up the HP 5334A B assumes the FREQ A function with the GATE TIME set at 300 milliseconds automatic trigger ON AUTO TRIG and automatic attenuation ON X1 X10 ATTN Any periodic signal connected to INPUT A at this time will self arm the counter and measurements will begin immediately provided the signal is within input specifications and within the restrictions set by the signal conditioning controls The displayed resolution is controlled by the GATE TIME setting 3 139 PERIOD A Key 3 140 The PERIOD A key selects the Period mode of operation for signals received through Input A The PERIOD A mode allows period measurements from 10 nanoseconds to 1 000 seconds The HP 5334A B automatically averages period measurements whenever the GATE TIME setting is greater than the period ofthe signal being measured The number of periods averaged is determined by the GATE TIME setting and the period of the input signal 3 141 RATIO A B Key 3 142 The RATIO A B key selects the Ratio mode of operation measuring the ratio of the signal frequency at Input A to the signal frequency at Input B The higher frequency can be applied to either input channel since the HP 5334A B can display ratios of less than 1 However it is recommended that th
178. he HP 85 program is listed in Table 4 4 It is an interactive program and almost completely self explanatory The program may be keyed into the HP 85 or loaded from an HP IB Verification Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 17 To run the program insert the cassette in the HP 85 and power up the controller If the controller is already ON insert the cassette and type Press the soft key corresponding to HP 5334A B and follow the instructions displayed on Cassette 1 2 CHAIN Autost then press END LINE 3 the HP 85 screen 4 The program automatically starts and displays the program title then the following checkpoint summary HE EEE HEHE IE HEHE HEH H CHECKPOINT SUMMARY HEAR HHH Hh 96e e 3e C496 964696 HEHE SE HEE MH HE Hee 0 O0 N O Oi A WP Power up Preset Remote Local Local Lockout Function Select Input Conditioning Channel A Input Conditioning Channel B Trigger Levels Gate Time External Arming Math Functions Memory Recall HP 5334A only Service Request Status Byte Send Error Code High Speed Output 5 The next screen provides the option to receive a printed version of this summary 6 4 44 Equipment set up instructions are provided with reference made to the manual then the HP 85 searches for the address of the HP 5334A B This search eliminates the need to HP 5334A B Performance Tests set the HP 5334A B to a part cular HP IB address and thus allows an a
179. hin tr e Pe ra ANE Yt rr n PA SPA rr a a i e Ia PH tm rea a i Rr rir rm HP 5334A B Operation and Programming ARMING CHANNEL CHANNEL A INPUT EDGE DISPLAY REPRESENTATION START STOP START STOP m OFF OFF NE f or START ARMED BY POSITIVE EDGE OF ARMING SIGNAL STOP ARMED BY GATE TIME MN d MN d gg EN a SELF ARMS START STOP ARMED BY ARMING SIGNAL GATE TIME SETTING NOT USED d E X UG X des oh hb d o4 eR ouo d oa START ARMED BY FIRST POSITIVE EDGE OF ARMING SIGNAL STOP ARMED BY SECOND POSITIVE EDGE TWO PULSES ARE NEEDED PERIOD OF ARMING SIGNAL ESSENTIALLY DETERMINES MEASUREMENT TIME GATE TIME UON i nor 4 Pot d eee eee START ARMED BY POSITIVE EDGE OF ARMING SIGNAL STOP ARMED BY NEGATIVE EDGE MEASUREMENT TIME ESSENTIALLY soe eee ED BY ONE PULSE OF THE ARMING SIGNAL GATE TIME SETTING NOT USED Figure 3 36 Arming Modes 3 35 HP 5334A B8 Operation and Programming 3 36 3 200 INPUT A B 3 201 BNC connectors are used at the point of entry to connect signals to the corresponding input channels INPUT A and B are used for all functional modes of operation except FREQ C and DVM HP 5334A only 3 202 ARM INPUT 3 203 The ARM INPUT uses a BNC connector at the point of entry for an external arming signal This input can be used to specify the START and or STOP of
180. igure 3 1 INPUT gt EVENT CONDITIONING REGISTER ARITHMETIC SWITCHING MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM AND MAIN GATE TIME REGISTER f 19 MHz TIME BASE EO OSCILLATOR Figure 3 1 Simplified Block Diagram of the Reciprocal Counter 3 10 With the addition of Option 010 Oven Oscillator temperature stability and aging rate are improved allowing extended calibration periods When Option 030 C Channel input is installed the frequency counting range of the counter is extended to 1 3 GHz 3 11 input Characteristics and Signal Conditioning 3 12 The HP 5334A B has two independent input channels featuring matched 100 MHz input amplifiers Each channel includes a full complement of input signal conditioning controls The major elements of the circuitry for each input channel are the attenuator amplifier and input trigger The input trigger converts the analog output of the input amplifier to a pulse train compatible with the counter s Multiple Register Counter MRC The data accumulated by the HP 5334A B Operation and Programming MRC is used by the counter s internal microprocessorsto compute and format measurements for display The counter s input characteristics described in the following paragraphs are Range Sensitivity AC DC Coupling Trigger Level Slope Control Input Impedance Attenuators Damage Level Separate Common Input 100 kHz Filter Arming Input o 0 9 9 a g G Specifications for the input characteristi
181. impedance attenuator setting and coupling selection Refer to the damage level specifications in Table 1 1 For accurate measurements the input signals must stay within the dynamic range and the signal operating range of the counter 3 42 SEPARATE COMMON A INPUT 3 43 Two separate inputs are provided on the standard Model HP 5334A B The A and B inputs are identical in specification Identical controls are provided for each input to allow maximum versatility and accuracy The COM A key located between the two inputs controls the selection of separate or common input All specifications are the same for separate or common operation except sensitivity and impedance Refer to Table 1 1 for detailed specifications 3 44 In the SEPARATE position the A and B inputs and controls operate independently of each other for applications in time interval ratio or other operations where signals applied to the A and B inputs are from different sources 3 45 In the COMMON position the INPUT B connector is disconnected and the A and B input amplifiers are connected together at INPUT A The channel A coupling and impedance controls condition the input signal to both channel A and B input amplifiers The input impedance becomes 500 kQ in the 1 MQ position when COMMON input is enabled shunted by 85 pF maximum In the 500 position the impedance remains 500 for COMMON or SEPARATE in put The signal operating range dynamic range and damage level remai
182. in amount of previous knowledge on the part of the reader must be assumed A variety of additional related documentation is available necessary to supplement this manual Users unfamiliar with HP IB or Logic Symbology for example may want to refer to the HP 5334A B Documentation Map to find additional sources of information These materials address in depth the specific areas of interest and should be used whenever xi 1 0 HP 5334A B General Information HP 5334A Figure 1 1 HP 5334B HP 8170 1378 POWER CORD 1 EACH Model 5334A B Universal Frequency Counters and Accessories TT J HP 5334A B General Information SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION 1 34 INTRODUCTION 1 2 This manual contains the information necessary to install operate and program the Hewlett Packard Model 5334A B Universal Counters The counters are shown in Figure 1 1 with supplied accessories 1 3 MANUAL SUMMARY 1 4 This manual is divided into four sections each covering a particular topic for the operation and programming of the HP 5334A B The information contained in each section is described below SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION describes the instrument documented by this manual and covers instrument identification options accessories specifications recom mended test equipment and other basic information SECTION Il INSTALLATION provides information concerning initial inspection prepara tion for use includ
183. ing COMMUNICATIONS 9 2 HP 1B Processor U17 not responding 9 3 Exec Meas CPU data communications failure 9 4 Exec HP IB CPU data communications failure 3 255 ERROR EXAMPLES 3 256 The following paragraphs demonstrates several key sequences that will produce an Error Message and include an explanation of the message displayed a Press RISE FALL TIME A function key T Press COM A or AUTO TRIG DISPLAY Error 1 0 CAUSE COM A and AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled in RISE FALL TIME mode Press X10 ATTN DISPLAY Error 1 1 CAUSE Attenuation is controlled by AUTO TRIG Press INPUT B 50 Z or AC DISPLAY Error 1 2 CAUSE INPUT B impedance and coupling are controlled by corresponding INPUT A key settings via COM A Press INPUT B SLOPE DISPLAY Error 1 3 CAUSE INPUT A SLOPE determines whether RISE or FALL TIME is measured and sets the INPUT B SLOPE accordingly b Press GATE TIME key to enable data entry mode 1 Press SINGLE CYCLE key DISPLAY Error 2 0 CAUSE Only RESET LOCAL GATE TIME and FUNCTION DATA keys are operational during GATE TIME ENTRY All other keys are nonfunctional 3 49 HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming Press 9 19 19 CHS EEX 9 Press GATE TIME DISPLAY Error 2 1 CAUSE Gate time may be set from 1 ms to 99 999 s 9 999E 9 exceeds the valid gate time range RESULT Gate time will defauit to previous setting and allo
184. ing address selection for remote operation and storage and shipment SECTION Ill OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING provides information pertaining to operating characteristics making measurements panel features operating features operator s checks basic operating instructions for local operation and programming information for remote operation via the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 1B SECTION IV PERFORMANCE TESTS Provides abbreviated procedures for operational verification which give the operator a high degree of confidence the the counter is operating properly and performance tests which provides the information required to check performance of the instrument against the critical specifications in Table 1 1 Also an HP IB verification test using the HP 85A desktop computer as a controller is provided in Section IV 1 5 Additional copies of this manual and the Service Manual can be ordered through your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Z N 1 6 SPECIFICATIONS 1 7 Instrument specifications are listed in Table 1 1 These are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument may be tested including typical characteristics as additional information for the user 1 8 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1 9 The HP 5334A B Universal Counters are Safety Class instruments provided with a protective earth terminal designed according to international safety standards Safety information pertinent to the operation
185. ion and Programming 3 46 3 250 PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS 3 251 Aseach HP 5334A B front panel key is pressed various parameter settings are controlled internally These are referred to as Preset and Lockout conditions The Preset conditions are the parameters and or key settings that are enabled on initial selection of each key The Lockout conditions are the parameters and or key settings that are disallowed after initial selection of each key Attempting to perform a disallowed key stroke or key sequence in a given mode of operation will produce a displayed error message Error Messages are described in paragraph 3 252 Preset and Lockout condition are listed in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Preset and Lockout Conditions PRESET CONDITIONS LOCKOUT CONDITIONS OFF RISE FALL SINGLE CYCLE none TIME A 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF EXT ARM SELECT OFF MATH DISABLE ON AUTO TRIG ON X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG M a atre e Ar A a at aar T rare a aa mar a as SENS OFF ON DACS 5334A only OFF ON gt COM A ON OFF INPUT B SLOPE controlled by INPUT A SLOPE SLOPE INPUT B COUPLING controlled by INPUT A AC DC INPUT B IMPEDANCE controlled by INPUT A 500 Z AMO Z FILTER A OFF ON NOTE INPUT B SLOPE COUPLING and IMPEDANCE are set to corresponding INPUT A settings via COM A DVM SINGLE CYCLE OFF Voltage 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF HP 5334A EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in DVM mode only MATH DISA
186. ions the HP 5334A B will display either an Error or a Fail message These messages typically occur during the Power Up cycle as shown in Figures 3 44 and 3 45 The fail messages generally indicate a hardware related problem Error messages usually indicate that the user has attempted a disallowed operation or incorrect sequence either through the keyboard or the HP IB Table 3 3 lists the Error Messages and Table 3 4 lists the Fail Messages 3 254 Error messages 1 0 to 2 4 as shown in Figure 3 45 are displayed momentarily and automatically cleared when the counter is in local operation Error messages 4 0 to 4 4 are only generated in remote operation Refer to paragraph 3 352 for details on HP IB Error Handling Error messages 5 0X to 5 2 and Fail messages may be cleared by pressing the RESET LOCAL key All keys are disabled when a fail message or an error message 5 0X through 5 2 is displayed except RESET LOCAL and POWER If a displayed Error or Fail message cannot be cleared refer to the troubleshooting information in Section VIII of the Service Manual 3 47 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Figure 3 44 FAIL Message Display Figure 3 45 Error Message Display Table 3 3 Error Messages FRONT PANEL SETUP DATA ENTRY KEYBOARD HP 1B PROGRAMMING SETUP MEMORY 5334A only No Error used via HP IB only
187. is automatically enabled when the HP 5334A B is operating in the RISE FALL TIME mode in this mode AUTO TRIG sets the trigger levels at the 10 and 90 points of the input signal in the PULSE WIDTH mode AUTO TRIG is automatically enabled to trigger at the 50 point of the input signal In the PEAK VOLTAGE mode AUTO TRIG finds the upper and lower peak levels of the input signal AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled and trigger levels cannot be adjusted manually when the counter is operating in either of these modes HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming 3 195 EXT ARM SELECT Key 3 196 External arming can be used to specify the start and or stop of a measurement by a signal that is not directly involved in the measurement When external arming is enabled a signal must be connected to the ARM input connector to armthe gate to open and or close Pressing the EXT ARM SELECT key displays the arming status shown in Figure 3 34 and allows the START ARM open gate and or STOP ARM close gate states to be changed Figure 3 34 EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Entry Mode Display Arming Off 3 197 The arming status is represented as St START ARM and SP STOP ARM The states are defined by arming off shown in Figure 3 34 and 7 arming set on negative slope and J arming set on positive slope as shown Figure 3 35 slope The channel A SLOPE key controls the START ARM and the channel B SLOPE key controls the STOP ARM Figure 3 35
188. l at address 03 The value returned is read into variable A The program then displays the definition of each bit and the corresponding bit value returned by the serial poil LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 LINE 70 LINE 80 Running the program produces displays similar to the following EXAMPLE 5 A TYPICAL MEASUREMENT FORMAT Conduct a serial poll of the 5334A B and read the status byte into A Display REQUEST SERVICE followed by the value of bit 6 of the status byte Display NO OSCILLATOR followed by the value of bit 5 of the status byte Display INSTRUMENT IN LOCAL followed by the value of bit 4 of the status byte Display FAILURE OCCURRED fol lowed by the value of bit 3 of the status byte Display ERROR OCCURRED fol lowed by value of bit 2 of the status byte Display DATA READY followed by the value of bit 0 of the status byte End program execution This program first dimensions string variable A in the HP 85 controller to 19 characters to accommodate the measurement output string Then sets the counter to its initialized state with a gate time of 500 ms 0 5 seconds The counter will make a simple Frequency A measurement The controller will then read the next measurement and cycle is repeated LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 LINE 60 Dimension A to 19 characters Send IN
189. l is preset at zero volts and the sensitivity can be varied by adjusting the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control 3 57 For channel A and B frequency measurements if SENS and AUTO TRIG are turned OFF the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control may be adjusted to the optimum trigger point Triggeringrange is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER light Optimum trigger point is usually midrange over which the trigger light flashes The trigger level may be determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key Trigger level controls may be readjusted while in the READ LEVELS mode The voltage displayed will be within the accuracy and resolution specified in Table 1 1 over a 5 volt range 3 58 The GATE TIME setting determines the resolution of the frequency measurement and may be displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key The gate timerange is one millisecond to 99 999 seconds in millisecond increments Note maximum resolution displayed is nine digits with one second of gate time One millisecond of gate time will display six digits of resolution 3 59 On power up the HP 5334A B initializes to the FREQ A function with the GATE TIME set at 300 milliseconds automatic trigger ON AUTO TRIG and automatic attenuation ON X1 X10 ATTN A periodic signal connected to INPUT A will self arm the counter and measurements will begin immediately provided the signal is within input specifications and within the restrictions set by the signal conditioning controls 3 60 Period Measureme
190. l prefix The last five digits are suffix The prefix is the same for all identical instruments the prefix is changed only to identify changes to the instrument The suffix is assigned sequentially and is different for each instrument If the serial prefix of your instrument differs from that listed on the title page of this manual there are differences between this manual and your instrument Instruments having a higher serial prefix are covered in a Manual Changes sheets included with this manual If the change sheet is missing contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed at the back of this manual Instruments having a lower serial prefix than that listed on the title page are covered in Section VII of the Service Manual 1 14 DESCRIPTION OF INSTRUMENT 1 15 The HP 5334A and HP 5334B are Universal Counters capable of measuring up to 100 MHz With the optional C Channel this capability is extended to 1 3 GHz The instrument s basic measurement functions include Frequency Period Time Time Delay Ratio and Totalize The resident Multiple Register Counter MRC and three single chip microprocessors used to generate data compute and display answers expand the usefulness of the counter by providing post measurement data manipulation This allows the additional power and convenience of user defined measurement function keys for Math Functions Pulse Width Rise Fall Time and voltage peaks of the input signal and the Mod
191. lator to the appropriate form for the desired application Note long gate times will slow down the output rate Data issent directly to the HP B in eight binary bytes terminated by an EO with the last byte The eight bytes contain the following data Byte 1 E5 E4 Contents of the MRC E register Byte 2 3 E2 in BCD binary coded decimal Byte 3 E1 0 Byte4 1574 Contents of the MRC T register Byte5 1372 in BCD Byte6 71170 Byte 7 ST Interpolator Start count binary Byte 8 SP Interpolator Stop count binary Overflow is indicated by 5 1111 binary or T5 1111 binary 3 348 The High Speed Output mode is recommended for the experience operator since after the data is received by the controller it must be translated for the measurement informationtobe useful High Speed Output is only applicable in frequency period time interval and ratio measurements 3 349 The High Speed Output data must be combined with the calibration data to calculate the desired measurement It is recommended that the calibration data be output first in the same measurement mode as the high speed data is to be output Note interpolation is not required in the ratio mode therefore the interpolator counts and the calibration data are not applicable for ratio measurements Calibration data is output in response to the TC command as follows C aaa bbb ccc ddd lt CR LF gt where aaa bbb ccc and ddd each contain three ASCII digits
192. ll 533465 only 880 DISP 11 Service Request 888 DISP 12 Status Byte 300 DISP 13 Send Error Code dig DISP 14 High Speed Gutput 320 IF C22 THEN DISP USING 5 86 GOTO 1090 330 DISP USING K 3 FS 840 PAUSE 550 CLEAR 56 DISP Would you like a printed versionof the checkpoint summary 3780 DISP 380 DISP YES Press Ki to receive a printed version 390 DISP 1000 DISP NO Press K4 to proceed 1010 ON KEY 1 YES GOTO 1050 1020 ON KEYS 4 NO GOTO 1110 4 49 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 50 So P2 J1 CO U Po BJ C3 cD OD 4 C Oo C3 S3 S5 Co CS Gy GO ge S CO Cs GS CO G3 CO GS CS CS CO CS CO C GC Gi CO C GS at qq fd C Gl O4 Cd 4 Gl C o Gb DJ pa BJ ma BO BO RD BO BO Qd e 0 00 09 gt aa tB CO N O3 Ul p CJ P CS tp CO GIG Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued KEY LABEL GOTO 1040 CLEAR CRT IS 2 C 2 GOTO 830 CRT IS C i CLEAR DISP The HP 85 should have an I 70 ROMin its ROM Drawer a i6K Memory DISP Module and an 82937A HP IB Interface Card Cable DISP DISP Connect the HP IB Interface to the rear panel of the HP 53346 B8 DISP and power up the instrument 74 DISP DISP Consult the HP 5334A B Operatingand Programming Manual for DISP additional information DISP DISP 8 PAUSE CLEAR TEST FOR OPTION 7900 DISP DISP Does instrument have OPTION 700 in
193. llisecond to 99 999 seconds in millisecond increments actual minimum measurement time is one period of the input signal For time interval modes such as T 1 B PULSE WIDTH A and RISE FALL TIME A the gate time setting varies the time between measurements For T I DELAY mode the gate time setting provides a continuously variable delay between START and STOP enable 3 111 SINGLE CYCLE key 3 112 When the SINGLE CYCLE gate mode is enabled the key indicator remains on and the counter makes and display a single measurement While the SINGLE CYCLE gate mode is enabled each time RESET key is pressed the counter updates and displays another single measurement Each time the SINGLE CYCLE gate key is pressed it toggles on or off 3 113 100 GATE AVERAGE Key 3 114 The 100 GATE AVERAGE key selects the Measurement Averaging mode of operation Each time the key is pressed it toggles on and off When the 100 GATE AVERAGE mode is enabled the key indicator remains on and measurement modes except the TOTALIZE mode Refer to paragraph 3 74 for further information on gate time control in the TOTALIZE mode of operation If the 100 GATE AVERAGE and SINGLE CYCLE modes are both enabled the counter makes and displays a single 100 gate average measurement 3 115 MATH MEMORY Group 3 116 in the MATH MEMORY section the keys toggle ON or OFF with the exception of the MATH SELECT ENTER key When the memory 5334A only as shown in Figure 3 2
194. luding plug E Earth Ground L Line N Neutral Jade Gray HP 5334A B Installation FOR USE IN COUNTRY United Kingdom Cyprus Nigeria Rhodesia Singapore Austrailia New Zealand East and West Europe Saudi Arabia Egypt So Africa India Unpolarized in many nations United States Canada Japan 100V or 200V Mexico Philippines Taiwan Switzerland United States Canada Denmark HP 5334A B Installation 2 lpio2 3 DIO3 4 DIO4 13 DIOS 14 DIOS az 15 DIO7 16 DIO8 5 EOI 17 REN oF 6 DAV on 7 NRFD 37 8 NDAC rd eie 11 ATN 12 SHIELD CHASSIS GROUND 18 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 6 19 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 7 THESE PINS 20 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 8 ARE 21 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 9 INTERNALLY 22 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 10 j GROUNDED 23 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 11 24 ISOLATED DIGITAL GROUND CAUTION LOCKSCREW 1390 0360 The 5334A contains metric threaded HP IB cable mounting studs as opposed to English threads Metric threaded HP 10833A B C or D HP IB cable lockscrews must be used to secure the cable to the instrument Identification of the two types of mounting studs and lockscrews is made by their color English threaded fasteners are colored silver and metric threaded fasteners are colored black DO NOT mate silver and black fasteners to each other or the threads of either or both will be destroyed Metric threaded HP 1B
195. ly the 53348 will be pro grammed for NEGATIUE external start and stop arm slopes 4740 DIZF Press EXT ARM SELECT to verify this 4750 REMOTE A 4TBQ OUTPUT A XAZ X03 ITTA LOCAL A 47EG DISP 4790 DISF BS 450 PAUSE 4810 CLEAR 48 0 SOSUR 7960 4 45640 CHECKPOINT 8 4850 I Math Function fest 4650 5 3 g0SUB 7816 du d G3 ER math offset ang normalize constants will be entered in the 5334A B The OFS QU wane pa ps wean oD Sp ao s Om oOo cn T CO nc 70 UD 4920 DISP and NML indicators on ihe 4939 ES5348 B front panel will light i od i2 8490 qe ti a j C3 A fj UC CT T CO ke 0 rA fe ael u LX Ur U oc Td US EN zb Ag IN 4870 OUTPUT A G MDO MN2 55 MO2 0 4980 WAIT 10090 4880 LOCAL A 5000 CLEAR 2010 DIZP Verify OFS and NML indicators are lit 5020 DISP 23030 DISP To check that the constants anre c040 DISP entered press the SELECT ENTER 5050 DISP key and verify that the 533465 B z050 DISP front panel reads 2 0 da C e fz Ca 7H C ECT ENTER key isplay should read 4 57 HP 5334A B Performance Tests ui ui cn ui un ur gi ut ui ih i ui BJ Dd PO pJ e me e meh A v D o 0 D g RB t rs amp amp m amp G amp S G G scog L PJ a 1 J n3 fA uuu DEDE t4 U tom fl S c Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued ISP FS AUSE REMOTE
196. ly within 3 for triangular trapezoidai and pulse waveforms 1V to 5V iX ATTN peak to peak PULSE WIDTH A Range 5 ns to 10 ms LSO 1 ns 100 ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE Resolution LSD Start Trigger Error x Stop Trigger ErrorG 1 ns rms Accuracy Resolution Trigger Level Timing Error 9 t Trigger Level Setting Error it Timebase Error Typicaily within 296 for triangular and pulse waveforms 1V to 5V iX ATTN peak to peak AC DC VOLTAGE AC maximum and minimum peaks or dc level of Channel A or Channel B input are displayed by Read Level function Frequency Range dc 100 Hz to 20 MHz Dynamic Range ac OV to 40V peak to peak dc 51 volts Resolution X1 20 mV X10 200 mV AC Accuracy Resolution x 10 of difference between maximum and minimum peak displayed Typically within 3 for a sine wave gt 00 mV peak to peak DC Accuracy mean value of dispiay X1 35 mV 0 5 of reading X10 300 mV 2 of reading Error Per Point flog scale 10 ps i i i 1Vims 10 mV us 100 mV us 1V us 30 mV ns 100 mV ns 1 V ns tG mV ps input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point log scafe Graph 4 Trigger Level Timing Error Affects the Start and Stop points of all time interval measurements Total error is the larger of the two trigger point errors MATH Ali measurements except for Totalize and Read Levels may be operated upon by MATH functions Math values ar
197. ment 3 74 Totalize Measurements 3 75 See Figure 3 53 for details of Totalize measurements The Totalize mode of operation displays the number of counts events received through INPUT A while the gate is open The count is continuously displayed accumulated from input cycle to input cycle Totalize is manually gated and is independent of the GATE TIME setting External arming may also be used to START and STOP totalize measurements 3 76 Pressing the TOT START A function key opens the main gate allowing the number of INPUT A events to be counted Pressing the TOT STOP A function key closes the gate and stops the count You may continue counting without resetting the previous total by pressing the TOT START A key again The RESET key clears the count and resets the display to zero Pressing any front panel key will reset the count to zero also HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 77 Voltage Measurements applies only to HP 5334A with Option 020 3 78 See Figure 3 56 for details of dc Voltage measurements Operating the HP 5334A in the Voltage mode requires the Option 020 DVM input module The module contains HI red and LO black input connectors for fully the floating autoranging Digital Voltmeter There is no need for predetermined gate times Gate time is automatically set at 100 ms when the Voltage mode is enabled The voltmeter measures dc inputs up to 1000 volts It automatically selects the 10V 100V or 1000V r
198. ming Guide Condensed Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Hewlett Packard Series 200 Basic Interfacing Techniques 3 263 HP IB Description 3 264 The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB is a high speed parallel interface bus All devices on the bus are capable of being addressed at one time However only one device may respond at a time The controller is used to command a specific device to respond and maintain the flow of data and interface functions 3 265 The HP iB system uses a party line structure devices share signal lines A maximum of 15 devices may be connected in an HP IB system in virtually any configuration desired There must be an uninterrupted path to every device operating on the bus 3 266 INTERFACE SYSTEM TERMS 3 267 The following paragraphs define the terms and concepts used to describe HP IB system operations a Address Each device on the interface is assigned an address The address is used to specify which device will receive information or send information HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 68 b Byte A byte is a unit of information consisting of eight binary digits called bits c Device Any instrument or unit that is HP IB compatible is called a device d Device independent Command A command predefined by the interface standard to have a specified bit pattern and resulting action e Device Dependent Comma
199. n unchanged 3 46 The A and B input amplifiers have independent LEVEL and SLOPE controls in both SEPARATE and COMMON mode of operation provided AUTO TRIG is turned off 3 47 100 kHz FILTER 3 48 The HP 5334A B is provided with a low pass 100 kHz filter for input signals applied to channel A The filter is tuned so that signals about 100 kHz are attenuated by approximately 3 dB 3 9 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 10 and all frequencies above 100 kHz are attenuated greater than 3 dB Use the filter 100 kHz FILTER A enabled to effectively attenuates noise and harmonics above 100 kHz which may affect the correct measurement 3 49 ARMING INPUT 3 50 The HP 5334A B may be armed made ready to start or stopa measurement by GATETIME control or the input signal ARMING OFF or externally armed by a signal not directly involved in the measurement ARMING ON Further information on external arming may be found in paragraphs 3 195 through 3 199 The external ARM input allows the operator to choose the point on a waveform at which the start and or stop of a measurement occurs Refer to Table 1 1 for specifications on the ARMING INPUT Figure 3 12 illustrates using external arming to measure frequency at various points along a modulated signal MEAS 1 MEAS 2 INPUT A TU Jiu ARMING SIGNAL 1 M ARMING SIGNAL 2 Figure 3 12 Use of External Arming to Measure Frequ
200. nce with the measurement application With AUTO TRIGGER on the TRIGGER lights will flash continuously and the front panel controls will be disabled 3 32 PROGRAMMABLE TRIGGER LEVELS HP 5334A ONLY The trigger level settings are programmed into memory whenever a front panel setup is stored The stored trigger levels are programmed into the internal trigger level controls DACS when the setup is recalled andthe front panel controls are disabled For further information on programming and setting the trigger levels via the 5334A front panel refer to paragraph 3 170 and Table 3 1 3 33 SLOPE CONTROL 3 34 The slope control determines which edge of the input signal will trigger the count With the positive slope selected a signal going from one voltage level to a more positive level regardless of polarity will generate a trigger pulse at the upper hysteresis limit With the negative slope selected the negative going edge of the signal will generate a trigger pulse at the lower hysteresis limit Trigger points for positive and negative slopes are shown in Figure 3 11 For some operating modes the HP 5334A B the slope control has other uses for example for rise fall time the slope is used to specify whether rise or fall time is being measured SLOPE TRIGGER POINT HYSTERESIS WINDOW Figure 3 11 Positive and Negative Trigger Points wu HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 35 INPUT IMPEDANCE 3 36 ta
201. nd A command that is specific to a particular instrument or family of instruments which is not predefined by the interface standard Device dependent commands are usually sent as ASCII strings of characters f Polling Polling is a process typically used by a controller to locate a device that has requested service from the controller There are two types of polling Serial Poll and Parallel Poll 1 Serial Poll When the controller executes a serial poll the addressed device sends one byte of operational information called a status byte If more than one device in the interface is capable of requesting service each device on the interface must be serial polled until the device that requested service is located 2 Parallel Poll The HP 5334A B does not have parallel poll capability 3 268 MAJOR INTERFACE FUNCTIONS 3 269 Each device on the interface may have one or more of the following major device capabilities Controller Talker or Listener The controller has the responsibility of controlling interface activity and must be equipped with the proper interface module Controllers transmit all device independent commands to other devices in the interface and usually have Talker and Listener capabilities Only one device on the interface may be the active controller at any one time The HP 5334A B Universal Counter had no controller capabilities 3 270 Talkers are devices that have the ability to send data or device dependent comma
202. nd Programming NOTE If Error 5 1X results try storing a front panel setup to determine whether it is due to a hardware failure Refer to paragraph 3 252 Error indications 3 257 DETAILED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3 258 The following paragraphs provide detailed operating instructions for the various functions of the instrument Step by step procedures are included in tabular form to allow youto become familiar with all of the basic functions For further information on operating the HP 5334A B refer to the following a Detailed description of the performance and function of the counter s signal conditioning and input controls such as sensitivity coupling selection trigger level control impedance selection and attenuation paragraph 3 11 Input Characteristics and Signal Conditioning b Detailed description of how the HP 5334A B performs in each measurement mode and application of the input signal conditioning controls within each measurement mode paragraph 3 51 How to Make Measurements C Overall description of the performance of the counter s display keyboard front panel memory gate time selection time base and auxiliary features paragraph 3 92 Front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors d Detailed description of the operation and function of each front panel key control and feature paragraph 3 92 Front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors 1 e Detailed description of the operation and fun
203. nd and receive measurement data UNL MTA LADn data TRIGGER Will cause a new measurement to be triggered UNL MTA LADn GET CLEAR Will clear the display starts new measurement and clears errors 1 0 through 4 4 UNL MTA LADn SDC REMOTE Disables front panel keys except for Reset Local IREN UNL MTA LADn LOCAL Enables the front panel keys UNL MTA LADn GTL LOCAL AND Enables the front panel keys and clears local lockout CLEAR LOCKOUT LOCAL Disables the Reset Local key when in remote LOCKOUT LLOJ l SERVICE This command is ignored when received by the instrument it will be sent REQUEST by the instrument when an enabled service condition is present STATUS BYTE STATUS BIT PASS CONTROL ABORT Presents status information UNL MLA TADn SPE data SPD UNTI Not supported Not supported Terminates bus communications by unlistening and untalking all instruments HFC pP HCM a M b m x a oe E DE IE amp rj 3M HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming 3 292 Meta Messages 3 293 To simply the use of the HP IB interface Hewlett Packard has developed what is called the Meta Message concept Rather than requiring the user to remember all the device independent messages and their interactions useful sequences of these commands have been integrated into a single command on many of HP s con
204. nds through the interface Note that a Talker will not actually send data or information until the appropriate command is sent by the controller The HP 5334A B Universal Counter has Talker capabilities When the HP 5334A B is talking on the interface or is addressed to talk the TLK annunciator will turn on in special situations a device may be classified as a Talk Only device and send information to Listen Only devices Such a system would have no controller For example the counter can be configured to TALK ONLY and send measurement results toa printer TALK ONLY Address is 50 3 271 Listeners are devices with the capability to receive information over the interface When the HP 5334A B is listening or addressed to listen the LSN annunciator turns on Listeners must also be enabled by the controller to receive data or information _ 3 272 Interface Capabilities 3 273 The capability of a device connected to the bus is specified by its interface functions These functions provide the means for a device to receive process and send messages over the bus Table 3 5 lists the HP 5334A B interface functions using the terminology of the IEEE 488 1978 standard 3 274 Device independent commands are standardized and are the same in all instruments Therefore the functions these commands perform can be listed on the instrument in a bo LE Au 5 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 5 HP 5334
205. nn 100 Hz Amplitude c cece ee eee tence neers eeeeenaeens 1V p p FUnCHON eos dus ET UC ER roci ees ERES nra Negative Ramp 4 30 m HP 5334A B Performance Tests VERIFY The Counter displays 8 ms 0 6 ms Fall Time 8 Record the fall measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 40 9 Set the function generator as follows Function iva sx dr Or bee ao e Positive Ramp 10 Set the HP 5334A B as follows CHAN A Negative SLOPE OFF rising edge VERIFY The Counter displays 8 ms 0 6 ms Rise Time 11 Record the rise measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 41 Failure If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification consider performing the adjustments in Section V of the Service Manual as a first step in correcting the problem 4 43 DVM ACCURACY TEST Options 020 and 050 HP 5334A only Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for DVM specifications Description Accuracy measurements are made on the DVM option of the HP 5334A FLUKE 343A 5334A DC STANDARD UNIVERSAL COUNTER Figure 4 14 DVM Accuracy Test Setup Equipment DC Voltage Standard s cigedsaiewesdveas yess FLUKE 343A Procedure 1 Set the DC Standard as follows Voltage EHE ee cae see deans 4 0000V 2 Set the HP 5334A as follows Reinitialize the 5334A FUNCHON eS LEES Ex ERI YER IRE RAE EY on DVM 4 31 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 3 Place a jum
206. nnel B Trigger Levels Gate Time External Arming Math Functions Memory Recall HP 5334A only Service Request Status Byte Send Error Code High Speed Output 4 47 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 1 20 30 40 50 58 7Q 80 80 i ag 112 t20 150 140 130 i5d 170 180 130 200 219 cad 230 240 2S8 260 270 z80 dQ 3508 310 320 330 242 350 3Bg 370 380 380 400 410 420 430 442 459 450 470 480 430 500 Sie 4 48 Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing i teehee HPOGSZAA B 5k HP 1B OPERATION VERIFICATION PROGRAM i J JD DATE 15 MARCH 1387 REVISION B This program exercises the 5334A 8 through the majority of its command code set via HP IB The program consists of 14 checkpoints and provides the user with the ability io execute and repeat these tests in any order Also provided are options to print the checkpoint summary and results The program relies heavily on subroutines in addition to arrays and simple variables VARTABLE TABLE A Address Byte information CRT status Decision Error value OPT 700 FLAG Loop variable Loop variable Trigger levels SRQ Byte information Result variable Result array Step number Value of byte High Speed Data array Co e TP IT CO Co 9 T OCC UO A OLG LE r7 NORMAL DIMENSION AND INITIALIZE STRING VARIABLE ARRAYS DIM ASCSQ BSC50
207. nronneana eranan roaraa 1 1 16 Specifications P 1 1 1 8 Safety Considerations ccce eu propt ra tea boa D 1 1 iu COIT rH 1 2 1 12 Instrument and Manual Identification lle sess 1 7 1 14 Description of Instrument i nciced esset Fax oca eee ie ESL 1 7 HEB or er M wah eae aaa i paw Seles ae we Ural ans 1 8 15205 DEOS za dou ocean ait teens wi jane Re A wt 1 8 1 24 Recommended Test Equipment 0 cc ccc cceccccuces 1 9 i INSTALLATION Sire kho tid a ene ERU ie EU a issu 2 1 2 HTC UCU OM ceases gnarh boda e vice sce M E e A aetate de 2 1 2 3 Unpacking and Inspection secessu 2 1 Bde Preparation fOr Uia MM T 2 1 2 6 Operating Environment 6 saw vede vou eA EL Tra Eel 2 1 2 10 Power Requirements ius ci aqoeg d dca rre busct rated Dr CO o hand 2 1 2 12 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection lcs 2 1 2 18 Power 5 TITTEN 2 3 2 20 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus 0 cece cece naano nourn 2 3 2 21 HP IB Interconnections Alls iia ih ame ora bans Das E EA 2 3 2 23 Cable Length Restrictions ccccceccccuccccecccece 2 3 2 25 Address Selection 17 2 35 iguscacnda tae MEE E aana noaaraa 2 4 2 27 FARSI DOSCHIDUOTIS sasipe Ka Whe pal oe pta REEL era 2 4 2 29 Storage and Shipment 00 00 eeu Me petu aM eens 2 4 2 30 Environ Mente ees pha la Ne ata Si hott on a da steed g ON Se kee on ans 2 4 539 RACKABIND wusmbtidephuerstactd av qiue E a dee Deleon dias t 2 4 IH OPERATION AN
208. nts 3 61 See Figure 3 48 for details of Period measurements The HP 5334A B allows signal period measurements to be made over a range of 10 nanoseconds to 1 000 seconds through the INPUT A connector Measurements displayed will be within the accuracy and resolution specified in Table 1 1 3 62 Period measurements are made by connecting asignal to INPUT A pressingthe PERIOD A key and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning The TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control may be adjusted as described previously under FREQUENCY mode measurements The gate time range is one millisecond to 99 999 seconds in millisecond increments and may be displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Period averaging is automatic whenever the gate time isset greater than the period of the input signal The number of penus average is determined by the GATE TIME setting and the input period A 3 63 Time Interval Measurements 3 64 See Figure 3 49 for details of Time Interval measurements The Time Interval mode of the HP 5334A B measures the length of time between a START signal at INPUT A and a STOP signalat INPUT B as shown in Figure 3 13 The START and STOP signals may be derived from separate signal sources or they may be from a single source Independent SLOPE and TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls for the START and STOP signals allow variable triggering on either positive or negative going slopes A single shot time interval measurement may be made over arange of minus
209. oad 3 135340 Suora49eJ4edo 9 2r49ueu e u OIO uot4do e19eds St ONG 3ndui euueu D eur Sejeotpur epou Lague Butunp pue joag4uoo esueg uehStu S9vQ 40 BIA 949p peceidstp jo uorz ei ndruew UDAO 4OLR LTOSO 411198348 uBtu eus o4 sSnie4s Buruue sutuuezep shay 3407S Sn4e4s sAerdstp tX33 8H23 AQ P9 O 94 4ueueujnsmseu 1sod eprAoad s ex HIYW luo perjdde st aewod 4n0 ABONVIS CANO WeeesS dH Bui49 o l4 ST WOO Spou Aujgue WHY Sejgeue pu snes 71V03H uor409 9e5 SSeuppe gj dH Sepr oad up UT NO u9u queuna4Sui But que xew OG AQOOT eD 3 0 3nduI 4939u4 OA Burue sKe dstp ex 1037138 WHY 1X3 hey 848p ej AQ pemoLjo4 y VOZY ay O4 amod sei dde As J3MOg eul OZO Uuot4do Jog uor4oeuuoo 4nduti eu AINO Vrees dH AINO VvPC S dH Swi Tui 30VH3AY 31049 iv w07 193135 3ivo O0 FIONIS BAI 31vQ 13938 Ch Ge C G oj s P EE Y Y LHYLS Y dOlS amp B vY OliVH NLiv OFX WHY dOLS i Y OIX WHY iuviS AXLIATLISN3SS 34035 IADSA O 9 O ha CE CE n3A311 S3427 Ov3H 9 p Bg 033 dao2gifHl HOVGs M3H VIYO NOIL2NO Quvx2vd 1137 CAINO YESS dH AOOO 94 dn eBuea eBe4j 0 9q padul 4e4eun o 30 BurBugao4ne Burzeois 1n4j ke epoui BeptapHd ORO HOTyep Vernpour AO Su XVWN O3 ALTATZLISUES syesscud ueugunseeu o4 a4ejunoo suuanjea epou aque pue S 6A9 4e88 44 ejqessnfpe eiep Aue Butung o44uoo eured quoAaj syeeg sieufDis g jeuusug pue syeog 84 29 95 440 AO O Specs waBBruy o GI dH C4 uU0o
210. ol fully ccw This sets the trigger level at 0 volts nominally and sensitivity to minimum T UE oe gu Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement is displayed 8 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to period measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 9 To manually adjust TRIGGER LEVEL turn AUTO TRIG off LED OFF and press SENS key to TRIGGER LEVEL position LED OFF Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control to optimum trigger point usually midrange over which trigger light flashes NOTE when AUTO TRIG is off appropriate ATTN must be selected manually PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT VATE SETTING HP IB COMMAND UNS HP IB COMMAND ISINGLE CYCLE OFF no lockout 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF no lockout EXT ARM SELECT OFF no lockout ON no lockout MATH DISABLE Figure 3 48 Period Measurements Preset conditions on initial selection of PERIOD A Lockout conditions during PERIOD A mode Y dus 85 5 i RA l DAI H E PE ELE big HP 5334A B Operation and Programming
211. or NOTE The 10 dB attenuator is used here for impedance matching VERIFY The Counter displays 90 0 MHz 2 Hz 4 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 49 5 Set the signal generator as follows FIedHeriCy codec tole tua vive VN EE dede ld e Pao 200 MHz Ampitude i Mte eese sued es a dU T 13 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator VERIFY The Counter displays 200 0 MHz t 3 Hz 6 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 50 7 Setthe signal generator as follows Frequency ee AT Cae Pere ee ne are CRUS 1000 MHz AImDITUBG A nus eu wa he aay nate Nei 0 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude will provide 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator VERIFY The Counter displays 1000 MHz 20 Hz 8 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 51 9 Set the signal generator as follows LIequenby cio pr ecco ve t eres eel ERAS 1300 MHz Amplit de Wr wisiias 0 5 dBm NOTE This amplitude provides 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input when using the 10 dB attenuator SOLAS ASE TT mec REUTERS MOUS ETL I ASH TUR Vot METUS UNS IR ORIEN INTR BREESE AB I HP 5334A B Performance Tests VERIFY The Counter displays 1300 MHz 20 Hz 10 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 52 Failure Perform Section V Adjustments 4 45 CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVI
212. orms a bit by bit binary AND using 15 and the evaluated integer to cancel out the upper four bits returns the integer result converts the numeric expression to the appropriate character and places the character in the second position of each 2 character unit read into A Returns to LINE 140 and repeats the process until the third byte has been read into A sets variable E equal to the numeric value of A the data from the E register Sets up loop to manipulate the second three bytes of every eight byte unit of data to calculate the number of counts in the time register Manipulates the upper four bits of each byte in the loop setup in LINE 190 using the same process performed in LINE150 and places the character in the first position of each 2 character unit read into B Manipulates the lower four bits of each byte in the loop setup in LINE 190 using the same process performed in LINE 160 and places the character in the second position of each 2 character unit read into B Returns to LINE 190 and repeats process until the sixth byte has been read into BY Sets variable B equal to the numeric value of B data from the T register Derives the decimal value of the seventh byte of every eight bit unit of data to determine the _ number of counts in the start interpolator and reads value into C Derives the decimal value of the eighth byte of every eight byte unit of data to d
213. ory and subsequently recailed When a measurement set up has been recalled the trigger level equals the stored value i trigger level controls are inactive The trigger level can be toggled between the stored value and front panel trigger level controi using DACS ON OFF function With instrument in STBY or ac power removed the internal battery will supply the nonvolatile memory for typically 60 days RESET Begins a new measurement cycle clears front panel data entry modes and error and failure messages PRESET PRESET LED indicates that front pane trigger favel sensitivity controls are inactive GATE OUTPUT HP 5334A only Rear panei BNC drives TTL levels into 1 kf Level is high while gate is open during ali measurements except Totalize DVM and Read Levels DISPLAY 9 digit LED display in engineering format plus l one digit exponent Range is 10 17 to x 9 99999999 X 1019 OPERATING TEMPERATURE 0 to 50 C POWER REQUIREMENTS 47 5 440 Hz 90 126 5V 47 5 66 Hz 198 252V 50 V maximum WEIGHT Net 5 3 kg i11 Ib 12 oz Shipping 8 1 kg i17 lb 12 oz DIMENSIONS 89 mm H X 422 mm W X 346 mm D 3 1 2 in H X 16 5 8 in W X 13 5 8 in D excluding bottom feet front handies and rear feet HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLS All front panel controis and functions except Option 030 Channel C sensitivity and power on stby switch TRIGGER LEVEL Set Channel A or B from 5 1V to 5 1V in 20 mV ste
214. pends on measurement application and other factors such as noise and interfering signals HYSTERESIS HYSTERESIS WINDOW WINDOW M an M PEAK TO PEAK AMPLITUDE MAXIMUM MINIMUM SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY Figure 3 7 Varying the Sensitivity Control Changes the Hysteresis Window 3 24 AC DC COUPLING 3 25 Selectable ac or dc coupling is provided for each input channel For signals with a dc content that exceeds the hysteresis limits of the input trigger ac coupling should be used Figure 3 8 demonstrates the hysteresis limits and the use of ac coupling UPPER HYSTERESIS LEVEL OV LOWER HYSTERESIS LEVEL a b DC COUPL ING AC COUPLING Figure 3 8 AC DC Coupling NOTE An input signal with dc content shown a would not be counted unless ac coupling as shown in b was used to remove the dc content rad o zal HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 26 TRIGGER LEVEL 3 27 Trigger level is the voltage at the center of the hysteresis window The actual trigger points are typically at the upper hysteresis level slope and at the lower hysteresis level slope as shown in Figure 3 9 ACTUAL TRIGGER POINT SLOPE _ TRIGGER HYSTERESIS LEVEL WINDOW I ACTUAL TRIGGER POINT SLOPE Figure 3 9 Trigger Level and Actual Trigger Point 3 28 One use of the trigger level control is to shift the hysteresis levels above b or below c ground to
215. per across the inputs of the DVM to short them them together VERIFY The Counter displays 0V 8 mV 4 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 42 5 Remove jumper from DVM inputs and connect the DC Standard to the HP 5334A DVM inputs VERIFY The Counter displays 4 000V 0 010V 6 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 43 7 Switch the polarity of the DC input signal VERIFY The Counter displays 4 000V 0 010V 8 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 44 9 Set the DC Standard as follows Voltagem cohol lt r d wissen RE ES Maece s ues 40 000V VERIFY The Counter displays 40 00V 0 10V 10 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 45 11 Switch the polarity of the DC input signal VERIFY The Counter displays 40 00V 0 10V 12 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 46 WARNING THE FOLLOWING STEP REQUIRES HIGH VOLTAGE EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED 13 Set the DC Standard as follows Voltage eeeeee nennen 400 00V VERIFY The Counter displays 400 0V 0 4V 14 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 47 15 Switch the polarity of the DC input signal _ VERIFY The Counter displays 400 0V 0 4V 16 Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 48 17 Reset the DC Standard to 4 0000V 4 32 wed d
216. periodic signal connected to Input B will self arm the counter and measurements will begin immediately provided the signal is within input specifications and within the restrictions set by the signal conditioning controls The displayed resolution is controlled by the GATE TIME setting 3 147 T i A B Key 3 148 The T I A B key selects the Time interval mode of operation measuring elapsed time between a Start signal on Input A and a Stop signal on Input B Independent SLOPE and TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls for the START and STOP signals allow variable triggering on either positive or negative going slopes Time Interval measurement may be made over a range of 1 nanosecond to 1000 seconds The minimum START STOP pulse width is 5 nanoseconds Gate time is controlled by the measured time interval Figure 3 29 shows a T I measurement display where the stop signal occurs before the start signal uv i RFS NMLO S ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE Figure 3 29 T I Measurement Display 3 25 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 149 Time Interval Averaging is done by pressing the 100 GATE AVERAGE key while in the Time interval mode Time Interval Average provides greater resolution of measurements than single shot measurements provide 3 150 RISE FALL TIME A Key 3 151 The RISE FALL TIME A key selects the Rise Fall Time mode of operation and automatically configures the counter to perform either rise or fall time measur
217. pper peak value H Transfer the numeric value of T rise time into numeric variable T Calculate the slew rate S by finding 80 of the p p voltage P and dividing by the rise time T Display RISE TIME followed by the value of T characters 11 through 19 SEC and execute CR LF Display P P SIGNAL followed by the value of P V and execute lt CR LE gt Display the value of 5 using the format DD DDe in LINE 130 and execute CR LF Output SLEW RATE followed by the value of S and V75 Return to LINE 30 and repeat the process End program execution Running the program will produce a display similar to the following 3 99 HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming EXAMPLE 10 TRANSLATING HIGH SPEED DATA OUTPUTS This program will take 140 readings in the High Speed Output mode read the calibration data in the same measurement mode then combine and manipulate the data to determine the frequency and print the results The HP 85 will alert the user beep before the data transfer begins and after the data transfer is complete This gives the user an idea of how quickly the 5334A B makes 140 frequency readings in the High Speed Output mode If either the E or T register overflows the program will enter a value of 9 99E 99 for the frequency reading Note that this is only one example for reading manipulating and displaying High Speed measurement data The operator may ada
218. ps iX ATTNiI Accuracy X1 30 mV 1 of trigger level reading X10 300 mV 1 of trigger levet reading OTHER initialize Transmit Error High Speed Output Transmit Calibration Data Device ID and SRQ Mask DATA OUTPUT Normat Operation Format 19 characters pius CR and LF Max Rate 10 readings second High Speed Output Mode Format 8 bytes of count data and interpolator Start and Stop counts Max Rate 140 readings second 55 readings second with Opt 700 Talk Only Mode Selected by entering an address of 50 LHP 5334A 31 HP 5334B INTERFACE FUNCTIONS SH1 AH1 T5 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT 1 CO E2 OPTIONS OPTION 010 High Stability Timebase Oven Frequency 10 MHz Aging Rate 5 X 10 16 day after 24 hour warm up Short Term Stability 5 x 10 10 rms for a 1 second average Temperature 7 X 10 9 0 to 50 C Line Voltage lt 5 X10 9 for 10 change 2 minutes after change Warm Up Within 5 x 10 9 of final value in 20 minutes OPTION 020 HP 5334A only DC Digital Voltmeter Range 4 digits autoranging and autopolarity in 10V 100V x 1000V ranges Sensitivity 100 V for 1V reading 1 mV for 10V reading 10 mV for 100V reading 100 mV for i1000V reading LSD Same as Sensitivity Accuracy 60 days 24 5 C 10V Range 0 045 of reading 8 mV 100V Range 0 045 of reading 80 mV 1000V Range 0 060 of reading 200 mV i20 minute warmup and RH lt
219. pt the process to suit the application Refer to paragraph 3 344 for further details on the High Speed Output data LINE 10 LINE 20 LINE 30 LINE 40 LINE 50 3 100 LINE 60 LINE 70 LINE 80 LINE 90 LINE 100 LINE 110 LINE 115 LINE 120 LINE 130 LINE 140 LINE 150 Begin numbering all subscripts of arrays with 0 This is the default array counting system and is noted here for documen tation only Reserve space in the HP 85 memory to accommodate 140 frequency readings Dimensions X to contain 140 eight byte units of data 1128 characters Eight characters are reserved for control of buffer activity Declares string variable X as an I O buffer Send IN TR1 GA 001 HS1 commands to the 5334A B IN initializes the counter FREQ A and sets the internal trigger levels to 0 volts TRT sets the internal trigger level controls on dACS On and turns AUTO TRIG off GA 001 sets the gate time to 1 ms for fastest output rate HST places the counter into the High Speed Output mode Send TC command to the 5334A B TC requests calibration data Read calibration data into variables C1 C2 C3 and C4 Signal operator at start of data transfer Place data bytes from the 5334A B into I O Buffer X in fast handshake mode Signal operator data transfer complete Sets up loop to manipulate 140 measure ments Optional produces an audible tone and a di
220. quency and Sensitivity Setup HP IB Verification Test Setup ccc cece cee eee nn HP 5334A B List of Figures HP 5334A B Documentation Map S334A B OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL 05334 30028 53348 OPTION 700 INTERNAL CIIL INTERFACE OPERATING PROGRAMMING 05334 90034 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC COUNTERS 5852 7506 REMOTE AND FRONT PANEL OPERATION OF THE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER 5952 7699 TUTORIAL DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS HP IP 5952 0156 INTRODUCTORY OPERATING GUIDE FOR HP S334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER WITH SERIES 200 COMPUTERS AND BASIC 5882 7758 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS HP I8 58401 90030 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE FOR THE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER 5952 7716 5334A SERVICE MANUAL 05334 90004 OR 53348 SERVICE MANUAL 05334 90030 LOGIC SYMBOLOGY ANSI IEEE STD 981 1984 5334A B SERVICE MANUAL Provides the information needed io repair adjust and test the HP 53344 B Universal Counter LOGIC SYMBOLOGY Describes logic symbols used in ihe Service Manual FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC COUNTERS Provides the basic concepts techniques and underlying principles of electronic counters REMOTE AND FRONT PANEL OPERATION OF THE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER Provides applications and programming examples along with a helpful description of HP 5334A remote and front
221. r example to subtract systematic errors or display percentage differences 3 120 The values for the user specified constants are entered from the keyboard Pressing the Math SELECT ENTER key once displays the current OFFSET value and enables the OFFSET ENTRY mode The key indicator and the OFS light will remain on and the ENTRY light will flash indicating an OFFSET value may be entered In Figure 3 22 the display shows the default 0 offset value Figure 3 22 OFFSET ENTRY Display 3 121 During the OFFSET ENTRY mode the FU NCTION DATA keys respond to the digits and special functions labeled to the left of each key see Figure 3 26 FUNCTION DATA Group As Uses HP 5334A B Operation and Programming each key is pressed the corresponding digit or special function will be displayed All other MATH MEMORY keys GATE and INPUT keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed For a negative mantissa the CHS EEX key must be pressed first After any digit has been pressed the CHS EEX key refers only to the exponent The Math SELECT ENTER key must be pressed a second time to store a newly entered OFFSET value 3 122 Pressing the Math SELECT ENTER key a second time displays the current NORMALIZE value and stores any newly entered OFFSET value Default normalize value is 1 i no OFFSET value was entered the displayed value will remain in memory The key indicator and the NML light will remain on and
222. ractical matter avoid stacking more than three or four cables on any one connector if the stack gets too large the force on the stack produces great leverage which can damage the connector mounting Be sure each connector is firmly finger tight screwed in place to keep it from working loose during use 2 23 Cable Length Restrictions 2 24 To achieve design performance with HP 1B proper voltage levels and timing relationships must be maintained If the system cable is too long the lines cannot be driven properly and the system will fail to perform properly Therefore when interconnecting an HP IB system it is important to observe the following rules a The total cable length for the system must be less than or equal to 20 metres 65 6 feet b The total cable length for the system must be equal to or less than 2 metres 6 6 feet times the total number of devices connected to the bus C The total number of instruments connected to the bus must not exceed 15 2 3 HP 5334A B Installation 2O2 2 25 Address Selection 2 26 The HP 5334A HP IB instrument address is input via the front panel using the MATH MEMORY keys and the FUNCTION DATA keys The HP 5334B HP IB instrument address is input via the address switch located on the rear panel Instructions for selecting the address are provided in Section if of this manual along with programming codes When the instrument is turned on the setting of the address is momentarily
223. rature for the crystal The STANDBY indicator will remain on when the power switch is in the standby position Therefore the input to the main power transformer plus the unregulated dc voltage to the oa oscillator oven circuitry is always energized whenever power is connected whether the POWER switch is in STANDBY or ON WARNING THE AC POWER CIRCUITS TO TRANSFORMER T1 THE STANDBY LED AND THE UNREGULATED DC VOLTAGE ARE STILL ON EVEN WHEN THE POWER SWITCH IS IN STANDBY CONTACT WITH THESE CIRCUITS CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT st 3 96 Note that the HP 5334A is provided with an internal battery not available for HP 5334B for continuous memory storage of up to 10 separate front panel setups The battery is recharged only when the power switch is in the ON position 3 97 RESET LOCAL Key a 3 98 The RESET key clears and updates the display in continuous measurement modes and SINGLE CYCLE gate modes resets the internal count to zero and resets the counter to zerointhe TOTALIZE mode Pressing RESET LOCAL when the counter is operating in REMOTE will return i the counter to the LOCAL mode of operation if the HP IBLOCALLOCKOUT command is noton HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 18 3 99 Front Panel Controis 3 100 The keyboard is divided into several groups according to the purpose of the keys From the left see Figure 3 38 are GATE MATH MEMORY MATH only for HP 5334B FUNCTION D
224. rbitrary address setting If the address is not found one or more of the following may be the cause HP 5334A B not powered up in TALK ONLY mode Addr 50 Interface not connected defective HP 5334A B set to 721 controller address set to 731 749 not valid addresses 7 After these initial steps the program begins the checkpoint execution The HP 85 display provides the description and operator instructions as each checkpoint is performed 8 Atthe end of most of the checkpoints the HP 85 displays the following prompt Press the softkey corresponding to the results of this checkpoint PASS Press K1 to indicate that the 5334A B passed FAIL Press K4 to indicate that the 5334A B failed Adan anm me GUAR GUA GURD TUA PAD GO UR COM UEA edm m axi den tmm ao dO GB TOM VAMOS KOH MA MEA Ch duh diih dmt nm jo 4m As instructed pressed the soft key corresponding to the checkpoint results For checkpoints 11 12 and 13 one of the following messages will be displayed instead of the above message The HP 85 has verified that the 5334A B passed this checkpoint or The HP 85 has verified that the 5334A B failed this checkpoint As indicated the HP 85 has been instructed to verify the results of the checkpoint and display its decision HP 5334A B Performance Tests 11 The next screen displayed by the HP 85 is shown below Press a soft key to select the desired checkpoint NEXT Press
225. rear panel including the optional rear panel inputs for Channel A Channel B Arming Channel C and the DMV HP 5334A only These features are shown in Figure 3 40 The following paragraphs provide p3 a detailed description of the function of each panel feature isi 3 210 HP 5334A AC Power Input Module 3 211 The AC Power Module permits operation from 100 120 220 or 240 volt ac The power module contains a printed circuit line voltage selector card which must be positioned to agree with the voltage of the power source When the card is plugged into the module the number visible in the module window indicates the nominal line voltage to which the instrument mustbe connected The correct value line fuse must be installed after the card is inserted see Section II Line Voltage Requirements paragraph 2 13 and Figure 2 1 for more information The protective grounding conductor connects to the instrument through this module tms d WARNING S ANY INTERRUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE INSTRUMENT OR DISCONNECTING OF THE PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL p WILL CAUSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT COULD z RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY AND OR DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENT 3 212 HP 5334B AC Power Input Circuit PT 3 213 The AC Power Input Circuit permits operation from 100 115 or 230 volt ac The ac power circuit contains two slide switches which must be positioned to agree with the volt
226. reen j LINE 50 Wait 5 seconds 5000 ms i LINE 60 Return to LINE 30 LINE 70 End program execution Ee EXAMPLE 5 C TYPICAL MEASUREMENT WITH WAIT MODE ON l si The WA1 command tells the HP 5334A B to wait at the end of each measurement to output the data During the 5 second wait period the counter will wait until the controller reads the measurement data before starting the next measurement sox d Note with the short gate time 10 ms the data displayed in this example is about 5 seconds old LINE 10 Dimension A to 19 characters LINE 20 Send IN WAT GA 01 commands to the 5334A B Command IN initializes counter to known state FREQ A mode on WAT places counter in Wait To Be Addressed mode GA 01 sets gate time to 10 ms LINE 30 Read 5334A B measurement into A LINE 40 Send contents of A to HP 85 screen LINE 50 Wait 5 seconds 5000 ms LINE 60 Return to LINE 30 LINE 70 End program execution 3 95 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming EXAMPLE 6 SEND SRQ WHEN DATA IS READY This example demonstrates the use of the Wait mode to ensure SRQ when data is ready The program initializes the counter sets the gate time to 1s and enables the Period A measurement mode The SRQ Mask is set to assert SRQ when data is ready and the Wait mode isset so that the counter will Wait To Be Addressed to send measurement data Additionally if the counter does not have a meas
227. reflects the message displayed by the HP 5334A B The error flag is cleared when the error is cleared as described a previously or when the TE command is received Note that the TE command clears the error 1 flag in the Status Byte but does not clear the error state The failure flag is cleared only by pressing the RESET LOCAL key gx sI 3 357 Preset and Disallowed Conditions 3 358 As each HP 5334A B function is selected various parameter settings are controlled internally These are referred to as PRESET and DISALLOWED conditions The PRESET conditions are the parameter settings that are enabled on initial selection of each function The ee DISALLOWED conditions are the parameter settings that are incompatible after initial selection of i each function Attempting to enable a disallowed parameter in a given mode of operation will i produce an error condition Error messages are listed in Table 3 3 PRESET and DISALLOWED conditions are listed in Table 3 13 including the equivalent HP IB commands Y 3 88 lis 3 l ane HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Table 3 13 HP IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions MODE PRESET CONDITIONS DISALLOWED CONDITIONS EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT PARAMETER HP 1B SETTING HP 1B COMMAND COMMAND FREQ A SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO FNIT 100 GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO EXT ARMING OF
228. rent gate time or delay time setting and enables the GATE TIME ENTRY mode Each time the key is pressed it will toggle on or off When the GATE TIME key is enabled the key indicator will remain on the current gate time will be displayed and the ENTRY light will flash indicating that entry may be made The desired setting 1 ms to 99 999 s is entered from the keyboard in decimal form scientific notation or engineering notation by pressing the FUNCTION DATA keys digits and special functions are labeled to the left of each key As each key is pressed the corresponding digit will be displayed as shown in Figure 3 20 e g the keystrokes are 0 4 5 6 Only RESET LOCAL GATE TIME and FUNCTION DATA keys are operational during GATE TIME ENTRY All other keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed TEE xuJ HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Figure 3 20 GATE TIME Selection Display 3 109 After the desired gate time has been entered pressing the GATE TIME DELAY key again will store the selected setting in memory and return the counter to the previous mode of operation If the displayed gate time is acceptable no input is necessary Pressing the GATE TIME DELAY key again will retain the current gate time setting and return the HP 5334A B to the previous mode of operation 3 110 For FREQUENCY PERIOD and RATIO modes the GATE TIME DELAY provides a continuously variable gate time from one mi
229. requency in the high speed data DISP output mode For this test connect a BNC cable from the DISP Time Base Output on the 53344 B DISP Back panel to INPUT DISP A 6770 PAUSE 5780 CLEAR 5780 OUTPUT A TRI 66 001 HSI B800 OUTPUT A TC 6810 ENTER A C1 02 C3 C 58208 TRANSFER A TO X FHS 5820 DISP D shous FASt dAtA 5840 DISP 5850 FOR IsQ TO 4 6850 IF INT NUMCXSLB J 1 8 J 11 18 8 THEN X J 9 99E99 68 GOTO 7070 6670 IF INT NUMOXSLB J 4 8 J441 715 28 THEN X J 9 99699 GOTO 7070 5880 FOR I TO 3 5890 RSLZ I 1 2 1 1 JCHRSCINT ONUMCXSLT48 J 1428 10 16 48 53800 RS L2 I 2 I JeCHRSCBINAND UNUMCXSEIS8 J I48 J 1 15 448 5810 NEXT I 5820 ESUAL IRE 8830 FOR I4 TO 6 659840 S8LZ I 7 2 1 712CHRSC INTCNUMCXSL I48 J I488J 12 16 848 5850 S8L2 1 6 2 1 6 JeCHRSCBINAND ONUMCXSEL T4881 148 J1 159448 5860 NEXT I 5870 BsUAL SS 5380 CsNUM XSEL8 J47 8 J971 5980 DeNUMCXSLB 48 8 1287 7000 IF C C34 4 THEN C C 256 7010 IF D ClZ 4 THEN DsD 258 7020 TeB CC C2 0 04 D C 1 CZ2 7TQ3Q0 X JOSE T 10000000 7040 NEXT J 7050 DISP 7050 DISP FS 7070 PAUSE 7 890 CLEAR 70980 DISP Verify that the screen displays the time base frequency 5 times 7100 DISP l 7110 FOR J TO 4 7120 DISP USING 71380 J 1 X J 7130 IMAGE 3D 2X FREQUENCY D DDDODe Hz 7140 NEXT J 7150 DISP 7160 DISP F 4 61 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 7170 7188 7180 7200 7210 7220 7230 724
230. ric character are interpreted as command terminators A decimal point and an exponent are allowed but not required Free format entries may be made in decimal engineering or scientific notation The maximum number of digits is 12 if a decimal point is entered and more than 12 digits are entered the excess characters are ignored If no decimal point is entered trying to enter more than 12 digits will produce an error Numeric entry 7 is input in the following format AA lt n spaces sign j digits gt lt K digits E sign L digits xd where 3 n Q to any number j 1to 12 K 0 to any number L 1 or 2 with any number of leading zeroes The following command strings are permitted and are equivalent OUTPUT 703 IN GAT1 5 BS1 XA3 OUTPUT 703 INGA 0015E 01BS1 0XA00 0345E 2 l 3 312 PROGRAMMING COMMANDS 3 313 All local functions are programmable with individual command codes via the interface In general all functions operate the same in remote as in local The HP 5334A B device commands are described in the following paragraphs and listed in Table 3 12 HP 5334A B Programming Command Set The individual commands are organized into groups for ease of description and use 3 79 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 80 3 314 Most of the alpha characters used to represent each function in the command set are underlined on the front panel of the counter For example in the MATH MEMORY g
231. rigger level voltages 7 Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to time interval measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 8 Press 100 GATE AVERAGE key NOTE The first measurement is not displayed until the gate has cycled 100 times Actual time depends on the gate time setting PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS s ae Ni Lockout conditions during TIME Preset conditions on initial selection of TI A B INTERVAL mode EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT HP IB COMMAND SETTING HP IB COMMAND no lockout no lockout IEXT ARM SELECT no lockout MATH DISABLE l no lockout Figure 3 51 Time Interval Averaging 3 57 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming RE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER MEWLETT PACKARD NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 7 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 Press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF 3 Connect signals to INPUT A and INPUT B jacks For ratio displays greater than 1 connect higher frequency to Channel A Note the 5334A B will display ratios of lessthan 1 butitisrecommended that the higher frequency be applied to Ch
232. rn to the E previous mode of operation and the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls will then be enabled Paragraph 3 167 describes how to return TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control to the front panel of the HP5334B gt 3 175 CONTROLLING 5334A TRIGGER SENS LEVELS INTERNALLY dACS ON Internal Control may be used to set the trigger sensitivity levels for most measurement modes except PULSE WIDTH A RISE FALL TIME A and PEAK VOLTAGE Pressing RECALL then CHS EEX will display the current Internal Control DACS status Pressing RESET LOCAL will exit the DACS entry mode without changing the current status Refer to paragraph 3 130 for further details on the RECALL operation and the DACS entry mode During measurements the trigger sensitivity 4 levels are controlled internally by setting dACS On TW 2 3 176 Internal Control is enabled by pressing RECALL pressing CHS EEX once or twice to s display dACS On shown in Figure 3 32 then pressing STORE The counter will then return to 1 3 29 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming the previous mode of operation but the trigger and sensitivity levels will be those settings from the last time the DACS were enabled Those sensitivity and trigger levels will besetinternally and the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls will be disabled Refer to paragraph 3 170 for details on programming trigger levels via the front panel Figure 3 32 DACS ON Display
233. roup the M for the group label and the D for DISABLE are underlined the alpha character set for Math Disable is MD 3 315 Command Group Descriptions 3 316 INPUT GROUP Most commands in the input group are equivalent to pressing a key ora sequence of keys on the HP 5334A B front panel when the counter is in the local mode of operation The binary commands is in this group are equivalent to a single key stroke and setthe corresponding parameter to ON 1 or OFF 0 The numeric commands AT and BT require a numeric entry that sets the corresponding trigger level to a specific voltage The nteger commands XA and XO are equivalent to the local EXT ARM SELECT key sequence 3 317 FUNCTION DATA GROUP All commands in the function data group represent a corresponding HP 5334A B front panel key All function FNn or FUn commands are integer commands that require a numeric entry after the alpha characters The n represents the number equivalent to the function selected as listed in Table 3 12 When a function command is received it enables the corresponding measurement mode To disable a measurement mode another function command must be sent 3 318 GATE GROUP Commands in the gate group are equivalent to pressing a key or a sequence of keys on the HP 5334A B front panel when the instrument s in the local mode The GS and GV commands equivalent to a single key stroke are binary commands that set the corresponding
234. s ON it indicates the key s labeled i Ces far ECKE HP 5334A B Operation and Programming function negative slope is in effect For external arming the A channel SLOPE key selects the START ARM state and the B channel SLOPE key selects the STOP ARM state referto paragraph 3 195 for further information on using START ARM and STOP ARM in the external arming mode 3 182 AC Key 3 183 The AC key selects ac coupling key indicator ON or dc dc coupling key indicator OFF for the corresponding input signal When in COM A the channel A selection determines coupling for both the A and B input channels 3 184 X10 ATTN Key 3 185 The X10 ATTN key selects the attenuation of signals at the corresponding input channels The X1 position key indicator OFF connects the input signal directly to theinput amplifiers X10 position key indicator ON attenuates the input signal by a factor of 10 When AUTO TRIG is on attenuation is automatically controlled by the input signal voltage and cannot be changed manually 3 186 50 Ohm Z Key 3 187 The 500 Z key selects the input impedance for the corresponding input channels When the key LED is ON it indicates the 50 ohm impedance is selected and 1 Megohm impedance is selected when the key indicator is OFF When in COM A the channel A selection determines impedance for both the A and B input channels 3 188 100 kHz FILTER A Key 3 189 The 100 kHz FILTER A key inserts a low
235. s displayed Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key Setting selection is entered from the keyboard by pressing appropriate FUNCTION DATA keys while GATE TIME key is enabled LED ON Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory and return to frequency measurement mode Refer to GATE TIME DELAY paragraph 3 107 To manually adjust TRIGGER LEVEL turn AUTO TRIG off LED OFF and press SENS key to TRIGGER LEVEL position LED OFF Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control to optimum trigger point usually midrange over which trigger light flashes NOTE when AUTO TRIG is off appropriate attenuation must be selected manually and sensitivity is set to maximum PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS Lockout conditions during FREQ A Preset conditions on initial selection of FREQ A FREQ B FREQ B mode 100 GATE AVERAGE no lockout EXT ARM SELECT no lockout MATH DISABLE no lockout Figure 3 46 Frequency Measurements EQUIVALENT HP IB COMMAND SINGLE CYCLE no lockout Eeen aam HP 5334A B Operation and Programming og iil SENSITIVITY CAUTION HP 33348 HP 5334A Make sure the amplitude of the signal does not exceed the 1V rms dynamic range l NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position
236. s toggle ON OFF each time the key is pressed with the exception of the READ LEVELS key When the READ LEVELS key is pressed the counter displays one of three internal registers Refer to paragraph 3 87 for information on the contents of the registers The registers are positioned to form an operational stack Once activated each time the READ LEVELS key is pressed the stack will roll up to display the next register After the third register has been displayed pressing the READ LEVELS key will return the counter to the previous mode of operation Note that the RESET key will NOT disable the READ LEVELS key 3 164 TRIGGER Light 3 165 The tri state TRIGGER LED Light Emitting Diode flashes when the corresponding channel is triggering is OFF when the input signal is below the trigger level setting and ON when the input signal is above the trigger level setting 3 166 TRIGGER LEVEL SENS Control NOTE Any references to DACS apply to the HP 5334A only 3 167 The TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control sets the voltage level at which corresponding input channel will trigger with AUTO TRIG SENS and DACS turned off and is variable over 5 voltsin X1 ATIN When the SENS key is enabled the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS control varies the sensitivity of the corresponding input from MAX to MIN as shown in Figure 3 31 When AUTO TRIG is on the trigger levels are controlled by the input signal and automatically set according to the measurement application
237. sage Otherwise the state of the HP 5334A B remains as it was prior to receipt of the LCLL message Disables the HP 5334A B RESET LOCAL key The HP 5334A B remains in remote operation until a LOCAL message is received on the bus The LOCAL LOCKOUT message can be used to maintain absolute programmatic control of the instrument This message is ignored when received by the instrument The HP 5334A B can send a SERVICE REQUEST message SRQ to the controller under any or all of the following conditions as defined by the Service Request Mask The Service Request Mask must be set prior to the condition Ail SRQ conditions can be masked off disabled by setting SM0 See SM Command paragraph 3 304 1 Data Ready A measurement has been completed and is available for collection 2 Error An error condition exists and is displayed 3 Local The instrument is in local operation The controller can read the HP 5334A B STATUS BYTE at any time to check selected operating conditions The assignment of the bits of the HP 5334A B STATUS BYTE are shown in Table 3 11 Terminates any HP IB activity and returns control to the system controller Terminates all bus communications by unlistening and untalking all devices Parameters remain as they were before the ABORT message Any partially entered HP IB data message is aborted 3 299 SRQ and Status Byte 3 300 The counter can send a service request SRQ to the controller to indic
238. sired setting is displayed Pressing the RESET LOCAL key will exit the DACS ENTRY mode without changing the current DACS setting During the DACS ENTRY mode only the STORE RECALL CHS EEX and RESET LOCAL keys are operational All other keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed Refer to paragraph 3 170 for further information on setting the DACS Figure 3 25 HP 5334A DACS ENTRY Mode Display E 3 135 FUNCTION DATA Group u FUNCT ION DATA T FREQ A FREQ B FREQ C E E E Mn is a j O A O AvB c A S O A s A HP 5334A ONLY PULSE ol o WIDTH A F os Figure 3 26 FUNCTION DATA Group 4 3295 HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 136 Function selection for the HP 5334A B is performed by pressing one key per function in the FUNCTION DATA group Twelve eleven for HP 5334B no DVM functioni function modes labeled in black above each key are directly accessible via the front panel Only one function may be enabled at a time Pressing another function key automatically disables the previous function Pressing the RESET key starts a new measurement but does not affect any current function selection or key setups To disabled a current function another function key must be pressed The key indicator LED identifies which function is active During a data entry mode i e MATH MEMORY or GATE TIME the key functions are reassigned to the numeric or special entry values labeled to the left of eac
239. splay to alert the operator that the controller is processing data If E register overflows set the measure ment equal to 9 99E99 and go to LINE 300 If T register overflows set the measure ment equal to 9 99 99 and go to LINE 300 Sets up loop to manipulatethe first three bytes of every eight byte unit of data to calculate the number of counts in the events register Manipulates the four most significant bits upper bits of each byte in the loop set up in LINE 140 Take each eight pun sg pra bou F LINE 160 LINE 170 LINE 180 LINE 190 LINE 200 LINE 210 LINE 220 LINE 230 LINE 240 LINE 250 LINE 260 LINE 270 LINE 280 LINE 290 LINE 300 LINE 310 LINE 320 LINE 330 LINE 340 LINE 350 Running FREQUENCY HP 5334A B Operation and Programming byte unit of data from X derives the decimal value of the first character in the string determines the integer value of the upper bits divide by 16 is equivalent to shifting the original binary number four places to the right to drop the lower four bits converts the numeric expression to the appropriate character and places the character in the first position of each 2 character unit read into A _ Manipulates the four least significant bits lower bits of each byte in the loop set up in LINE 140 Takes each eight byte unit of data from X drives the decimal value of the first character in the string perf
240. splays 80 MHz 2 Hz 5 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 25 6 Set the signal generator as follows regquetiby sce xs seus t conta ee tae du ee eres 100 MHz Amplitude s ciere seriei mee retro he nnn 50 mV rms VERIFY The Counter displays 100 MHz 2 Hz 7 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 26 8 Set the signal generator as follows Fredquelicy oie DIU ER EA 4 a area Neer Ena I Nn 80 MHz Amplit de srdro saared voiria kokou i esee rh nnn 50 mV rms 9 Set the HP 5334A B as follows VERIFY The Counter displays 80 MHz 2 Hz 10 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 27 11 Set the signal generator as follows Frequency eccere ener ame ten tk rs nre e 100 MHz Amplitude Sont eR ARES Salata Nee RE 50 mV rms VERIFY The Counter displays 100 MHz X 2 Hz 4 22 AUS HP 5334A B Performance Tests 12 Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 28 Failure If any of these tests fail referto Section V Adjustments paragraphs 5 16 and 5 18 as a first step in troubleshooting 4 36 CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST 80 MHz 100 MHz For Option 060 Instruments This test is for instruments that contain the Option 060 i e instruments with both Front and Rear Inputs Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Option 060 Frequency Response and Sensitivity specifi
241. stalled DISP DISP YES Press Ki DISP DISP NO Press K4 ON KEY 1 YES GOTO 1570 ON KEYF 4 NO GOTO 1380 KEY LABEL GOTO 1350 CLEAR F i 6 GOTO 1339 Fee INPUT S334A 8 ADDRESS CLEAR NS NOTS334A B l DISP Input 5334A B address DISP i DISP Example 703 DISP DISP Press END LINE after entry INPUT A CLEAR SET TIMEOUT 713500 IF F 2 THEN 1530 OUTPUT GAL WAIT i000 REMOTE A UUTPUT A a1 HP 5334A B Performance Tests Table 4 4 HP IB Operational Verification Program Listing Continued 1550 ENTER A N 1550 IF NS HP5334 amp THEN 1770 1570 IF N HPS334B THEN 1770 1580 CLEAR A 1580 ABORTIO 7 1500 BEEP 1619 WAIT 250 1620 BEEP 1638 DISP No response at that address 164 DISP 850 DISP Verify HP IB connection option configuration the 53345 B is on 1BEO DISP and not in the TALK ONLY mode 1670 DISP 1580 DISP An ERROR message on the S33407B denotes an INCORRECT answer iB30 DISP to OPTION 700 question 1700 DISP 17180 DISP ces an ERROR occurred 1720 DISP Recheck option configuration 1750 DISP Cycle power switch on 53348 B 1740 DISP Press RUN to restart program 1750 PAUSE 1750 GOTO 1400 1770 DISP 1780 DISP HP S334A B found at address iA 1780 WAIT 3000 1800 CLEAR 1812 DISP 1820 DISP NOTE 1830 DISP 1840 DISP An ERROR message on the S334A B denotes an INCORRECT answer 1850 DISP to OPTION 700 question i 1850 DISP
242. sult in personal injury Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation If this instrument isto be energized via an autotransformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earthed pole terminai neutral of the power source Instructions for adjustments while covers are removed and for servicing are for use by service trained _ personnel only To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform such adjustments or servicing unless qualified to do so For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with 250V fuse s of the same current rating and type for example normal blow time delay Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fusehoiders When measuring power line signals be extremely careful and always use a step down isolation trans former whose output voltage is compatible with the input measurement capabilities of this product This product s front and rear panels are typically at earth ground so NEVER TRY TO MEASURE AC POWER LINE SIGNALS WITHOUT AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER oa Britt HP 5334A B Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page i GENERAL INFORMA ION aa visio enced onic decree tod eak 1 1 Ti Introduction MUTET E e EET 1 1 1 3 Manual Summary esssaasoaaurreanu
243. sured time interval The HP 5334A B makes single shot time interval measurements and displays them continuously from gate cycle The gate time settings control the time between measurements When the SINGLE CYCLE gate key is enabled each time the RESET key is pressed a single measurement is made and displayed Pressing the SINGLE CYCLE gate key again returns the HP 5334A B to the normal Time Interval mode 3 68 Time Interval Averaging is done by pressing the 100 GATE AVERAGE key while intheTime Interval mode Time Interval Average provides greater resolution of measurements than single shot measurements provide See Figure 3 51 for details of Time Interval Averaging measurements 3 69 Time Interval Delay Measurements 3 70 See Figure 3 50 for details of Time Interval Delay measurements The Time Interval Delay mode of operation is similar to Time Interval mode but with the following additional control the front panel GATE TIME control inserts a variable delay between the START INPUT A event and the enabling of the STOP INPUT B event as shown in Figure 3 14 Potential STOP events are ignored during the specified delay The delayed time interval may be continuously measured and displayed by pressing the T 1 B DELAY function key GATE TIME DELAY is the same as the gate time setting and may be displayed by pressing the GATE TIME DELAY key while in the Time Interval Delay mode The gate time delay is adjustable over a range of one millisecond
244. surements E ia 3 56 ix P AE A aAA r a A a enn beeen mdr Lardner T P I I Na i n a i PH N ATA P CHR LL ACLARA EDITA EARS KT Sacr MARS L3 i VEL RS AME CERT R HP 5334A B Operation and Programming RA 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER HEWLETT PACKARD 3 9 wy gr um 100 e4Tit NLE AVERAGES NOTE For specifications concerning bandwidth accuracy and amplitude on input signals refer to Table 1 1 1 Press POWER switch to ON position 2 If Start and Stop signals are from seperate sources connect Start signal to INPUT A jack Stop signal to INPUT B jack and press COM A key to SEPARATE position LED OFF If Start and Stop signals are from a common source connect signal to INPUT A jack and press COM A key to COMMON position LED ON 3 Press T I A B function key and press AUTO TRIG off 4 Press AC DC 500 Z 1MQ SLOPE and X10 ATTN keys to appropriate positions NOTE When the COM A key is in COMMON LED ON only the A CHANNEL A AC DCi and 500 Z 1MQO keys are effective However X10 X1 ATTN SLOPE and TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls operate independently 5 Press SENS key to TRIGGER LEVEL position LED OFF This sets the sensitivity to maximum and allows variable selection of trigger levels 6 Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls for optimum triggering usually midrange over which trigger lights flash Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific t
245. swusamt Ge LAO T 3 297 Through meta messages devices on the bus can exchange control and measurement information A detailed description of these messages and the HP 5334A B response to each message are provided in the following paragraphs 3 298 Meta Message Response DATA The HP 5334A B sends measurement data as defined by the device dependent command received from the controller TRIGGER Clears the HP 5334A B display and starts a new measurement CLEAR Clears the HP 5334A B display and starts a new measurement Clears errors numbered 1 0 through 4 4 but does not clear errors 5 0X through 5 2 nor any failures HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 76 REMOTE LOCAL The HP 5334A B goes into remote when it receives the REMOTE message on the HP IB All front panel controls except the RESET LOCAL key are ignored in REMOTE operation the HP 5334A B is programmed by the controller via messages sent over the bus Until changed via the bus the state of the HP 5334A B remains as it was prior to receipt of the REMOTE message Returns the HP 5334A B to front panel control retains state prior to receipt of the LOCAL message NOTE The HP 5334A B does not respond to any device dependent commands when in LOCAL operation LOCAL CLEAR LOCAL LOCKOUT LOCKOUT SERVICE REQUEST STATUS BYTE ABORT Returns the HP 5334A B to front panel control following a LOCAL LOCKOUT mes
246. t panel setup will not be saved To save a front panel setup press the STORE key then one of the DATA keys 3 130 RECALL Key HP 5334A Only 3 131 The Memory RECALL key permits one often previously stored panel setups to be recalled into the front panel allows the HP 5334A HP IB address to be displayed and or changed and allows the previously stored trigger and sensitivity levels to be reset Register numbers are entered from the keyboard Pressing the RECALL key enables the RECALL ENTRY mode The key indicator will remain on and the ENTRY light will flash indicating an entry is expected The RECALL is completed by pressing one of the numeric DATA keys 0 9 The complete setup stored at the indicated location will be recalled to the front panel including the function The counter will then resume making measurements and displaying the results NOTE The trigger and sensitivity levels are set internally when asetup is recalled and the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls are not operational To return to front panel control of the trigger and sensitivity levels refer to instructions in paragraph 3 174 3 132 Each time RECALL key is pressed it toggles on or off When the RECALL ENTRY mode is enabled only RECALL RESET LOCAL and the keys in the FUNCTION DATA group are operational All other front panel keys are nonfunctional and will display Error 2 0 if pressed If RECALL or RESET LOCAL is pressed while in the RECALL ENTRY mode the
247. t the procedure with various front panel setups using storage locations 0 9 Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 8 What Checked CMOS RAM and support circuitry For Failures Refer to Section Vill of the Service Manual The Executive and Front Panel Blocks are the main components of the test 4 24 DVM Options 020 and 050 HP 5334A Only Description Two functional checks are made of the DVM option for the HP 5334A Procedure 1 Place a jumper across the inputs of the DVM to short them together 2 Set the HP 5334A as follows Reinitialize the 5334A FUNCTION m Observe The HP 5334A front panel displays 0V 8 mV 3 Connect the rear panel GATE OUT signal to the HP 5334A DVM inputs Observe The HP 5334A front panel displays a measurement gt 50 mV Test Record Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card line 9 What Checked DVM zero and basie measurement capability For Failures Refer to Section VII of the Service Manual The DVM Measurement Executive and Front Panel blocks are involved here 4 25 CHANNEL C Options 030 and 050 HP 5334A This operational check is for HP 5334A s containing Options 030 and 050 Description The Channel C option is checked by simply measuring a frequency within its range of 90 MHz to 1300 MHz 4 10 Bux d baal Bue Era ata HP 5334A B Performance Tests Equipment A signal source capable o
248. t to the same line voltage as the power source or damage to the instrument may result For details see Power Requirements Line Voltage Selection Power Cable and associated warnings and cautions in Section Il of this manual NOTE To avoid confusion each test procedure begins with a RE INITIALIZATION of the instrument This simply means switching the HP 5334A B to STANDBY and then to ON Procedure 4 Set the HP 5334A B as follows POWER toate wera Aa a e X e sae sae QE sella VINE OS STANDBY TIME BASE Lausp eseexc o Nas exx hr nd INT rear panel 2 Connect the HP 5334A B as follows HP 5334A B Power Cable sese to Line Voltage Observe STANDBY LED is ON 3 Do not connect an input signal to the HP 5334A B 4 16 POWER UP SELF TEST DIAGNOSTIC MODE Description During the power up sequence the HP 5334A B performs a fairly thorough check of major components Procedure 1 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Observe STANDBY LED goes out 2 All front panel LEDs light momentarily except STANDBY LED which does not light and ARM and GATE annunciators which flash alternately 3 The instrument s model number HP 5334A or HP 5334b is displayed 4 2 ES 8 93 spia rh get ave fot HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 The instruments HP IB address is displayed Address 03 is set at the factory but can be set by the user to addresses 00 to 30 5 If th
249. t00 kHz 1 MHz t0 MHz 100 MHz GHz Input Signal Frequency F log scale Graph 1 Frequency Resolution Error Noise on the input signal and internal uncertainties affect Frequency and Period measurements For Period invert the period iP of the input signal F L and find frequency P i i Bios TR error AF Period error AP E X P TIME INTERVAL A to B Range 1 ns to 1025s is ngle shoti 10s i100 GATE AVERAGE LSD i ns 100 ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE Resolution LSD Start Trigger Error Stop Trigger Error 5 amp 1 ns rms Accuracy Resolution Timebase Error Trigger Level Timing Error Trigger Level Setting Error 2 ns TIME INTERVAL DELAY Used with Time Interval A to B a selectable delay can be inserted between START Channei A trigger and STOP i Channel B trigger Electrical inputs during delay are ignored Specifications are the same as for Time Interval A to B Delay Range 1 ms to 99 999 s 1 ms stepsi Delay Accuracy 100 us 0 05 X DELAY TIME RATIO A B Range 001 Hz to 100 MHz both channels LSD x 4 X RATIO IFREQ A X Gate Time Resotution iso B Trigger Error x Ratio Gate Time Accuracy Same as Resolution Specified for higher frequency input connected to Channel A TOTALIZE A Range 0 to 1012 1 LSD Displayed 1 count of input signal Resolution LSD Accuracy LSD 0 1 s gate 100 uVrms noise 1 Vpp sine wave Frequen
250. te line voltage to be used The correct value of line fuse with a 250 volt rating must be installed after the card is inserted This instrument uses a 0 5A fuse HP Part Number 2110 0202 for 100 120 volt operation a 0 25A fuse HP Part Number 2110 0201 for 220 240 volt operation 2 15 To convert from one line voltage to another the power cord must be disconnected from the power module before the sliding window covering the fuse and card compartment can be moved to expose the fuse and circuit card See Figure 2 1 2 16 HP 5334B LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION Power line connections are selected by various combinations of settings of the two slide switches The combinations of switch settings and their selected line voltages are shown on the HP 5334B rear panel under LINE SELECT see Figure 2 2 The correct value of line fuse with a 250 volt rating must be installed after setting the switches This instrument uses a 0 75A fuse HP Part Number 2110 0360 for 100 120 volt operation a 0 375A fuse HP Part Number 2110 0421 for 220 240 volt operation 2 17 To convert from one line voltage to another BE SURE to disconnect the power cord from the power LINE socket before changing the setting of a slide switch i SELECTION OF OPERATING VOLTAGE 1 Open cover door and rotate fuse pull to teft 2 Select operating voltage by orienting PC board to posi tion desired voltage on top left side Push board firmiy into module slot Rotate fus
251. ters which are arranged in the following format Alpha character Variable number of spaces N spaces t sign One digit Decimal point Variable number of digits K digits E t sign Two exponent digits Carriage return Line feed eToIe oTo oT To Po T Io Do o e 21015 ALPHA MEASUREMENT EXPONENT CHARACTER DATA FIELD 4 CHARACTERS i1 CHARACTER 14 CHARACTERS lt N SPACES ONE DIGIT gt lt K DIGITS gt The decimal point is omitted if it is the last character preceding the exponent E in the output string The first digit will be zero only if the data output is zero At times the display may contain a number which is equivalent to zero such as OE 9 If this is the case the HP IB output will be X OE 00 lt CR LF gt where X is the alpha character for the type of measurement 3 335 ALPHA CHARACTER One of 12 single characters which generally specify the type of measurement It usually indicates the type of units The alpha characters are F precedes Frequency measurements units are Hz Hertz S precedes Time measurements units are S Seconds V precedes Voltage measurements units are V Volts R precedes Ratio measurements no units T precedes Totalize Stop measurements no units t precedes Totalize Start measurements no units A precedes Channel A trigger level units are V Volts B precedes Channel B trigger level units are V Volts H precedes Channel A and B upper peak levels edi lsa f oe
252. the ENTRY light will flash indicating a NORMALIZE value may be entered During the NORMALIZE ENTRY mode the front panel keys operate in thesame manner as the offset entry mode To store a newly entered NORMALIZE value the math SELECT ENTER key must be pressed a third time 3 123 Pressing the Math SELECT ENTRY key a third time exits all math entry modes stores any newly entered NORMALIZE value and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation If no NORMALIZE value was entered the displayed value will remain in memory Pressing the RESET LOCAL key at any time during a math entry mode will exit all math entry modes immediately and return the counter to the previous mode of operation Current entries will not be stored if the math entry mode is exited with the RESET LOCAL key 3 124 DISABLE Key 3 125 When the counter is not in a math entry mode the math DISABLE key permits the overall math operations to be disabled and then reestablished without having to reenter constants Each time the key is pressed it toggles on or off When the Math DISABLE key is on the key indicator remains on and all math operations are disabled When the key is turned off any previously entered math constants will be reenabled Math operations are automatically disabled whenever the function selection is changed i e FREQ A PERIOD A etc 3 126 STORE Key HP 5334A Only 3 127 The Memory STORE key permits up to 10 complete front panel setups to b
253. tostart and or stop a measurement and waiting for an input signal edge D GATE The GATE annunciator shows the status of the counter s gate Before a measurement starts this light is off indicating the gate is closed During a measurement the light is on indicating the gate is open When the gate duration is 100 ms the gate light will remain on for a minimum of 100 ms Figure 3 38 Front Panel Display and Annunciators Continued 6 10129UUO07 pue si03e2ipuj sJo43u07 saunjeo 4 jaued 10043 6 94n814 7 Aewod pe qeue st Aujue WII 31y9 ueuw S Gy dWv 3Hd Pu ALIAILISN3S siqeasnfpe dog Suot498 es exy Ndur pue s 9A9 3LVG NOILONNS S43 BIA 399 S666 ES peprAoud 84e s o44uo ZH9 93 dn uot3921 dde 4ueueJnseeu og sues 4eBB14 HiVW 3AIi 31V9 NOILONn oy su go eDuga AvT30 3411 31V9 ZHA OB WOU S4ueueJnseeu AON3n03Hi 494 Burpaoooe j ouquco jsae sueg 4eBBia pue Durpnj outi pejjeoed pue peao4s eq o3 sdn4es P pu UOTIOELSS 39VyH3AY 31V9 OOT1 sept oad ogg uotr3do ejinpou 9 LAdNI SUL UOTPENUSZZE OTPBWOFNE S49e es NO OINL OLNV peued 4uoaj Op 0 dn mol Le S SX AHORGW pue 31940 IWNOIS epaod shay Five Dpejgeue Si uque USuM peued 4uoJj BUY uoajg 4ueueoe dea 404 did IMMO d uic ua eiqgrsseoos si pue vg St TOLO OTTZ 9N S 9 8 sueg aeBBraj 4O oaq4uoo BUJU Suk S4ue4Suoco u4ts 3ZIdVWHON pug 449g dH 9esSnj eui Jo39euuco pesnj pejgesip sr Buruue euueLxe 40 jeued 4uo4j jo UOTZOS eas sopt A
254. trol Shifts Hysteresis Window eene 3 7 Positive and Negative Trigger Points isses nnn 3 8 Use of External Arming to Measure Frequency nnn 3 10 Time Interval Measurement 000 cers cc cnc secennssasaceasaanes 3 12 Time Interval Delay Measurement 0 0 ccc cece cece me nnn 3 13 Pulse Width Measurement cesses dweke rece rexdkd kac Oo eens eye 3 14 Rise Fall Time Measurements 2 0 ccc ccc cee hh 3 15 Channel A Peak Voltage Measurement Display sd aet dci et are eee ated 3 15 Intermediate Power up Display cceeee cece t 3 16 GATE Group c ciske er dore cec Co Cea Rie ha eoe bag Vae P ey eon 3 18 GATE TIME Selection Display sese 3 19 MATH MEMORY Group scs wer he an ph heme hr hid as 3 20 OFFSET ENTRY Display esses ehh htt 3 20 HP 5334A STORE ENTRY Mode Display enne 3 21 HP 5334A RECALL ENTRY Mode Display ees ch Saad eta 3 22 HP 5334A DACS ENTRY Mode Display eee 3 23 FUNCTION DATA Group oo ccc cece ect e eect hh tan 3 23 Ratio Measurement Display escena 3 24 Pulse Width Measurement Display see nn 273225 T L Measurement Display wise bcs t a Iro Rape EY RXS err ti pints 3 25 INPUT GIOUD cerco essa teca ebd Cr abase od du RON EL Md 3 27 Trigger Level Sensitivity Control Application cess cece ee eeee 3 28 DACS ON Display ete pedis ewe a E xd RU a d e utn viis Via ado 3 30 Channel B Peak Voltage Measurement Display ER TEN
255. trollers For exampie to clear the instrument at address 03 using the device independent commands it is necessary to send the sequence ATN UNL MTA LAD 03 SDC The HP 85 command CLEAR703 sends the same sequence with no further user interaction This greatly simplifies the use of the interface 3 294 Many of the meta messages implemented on the HP 85 may be sent in either of two forms with addressing or without addressing The form with addressing will normally address a particular device to listen For example the command REMOTE7 will send a REN without making any device a listener while the command REMOTE703 will send REN and then make device at address 03 a listener In the following tables the form with addressing is shown 3 295 Meta messages their results in the HP 5334A B and the typical interface message sequences corresponding to them are listed in Table 3 9 The sequence are typical in that different controllers may send different sequences while still producing the same resuits 3 296 Meta messages and the HP 9825 and HP 85 commands that correspond to them are listed in Table 3 10 Only the addressed form is shown for the commands that support both the unaddressed and addressed forms The table assumes the instrument is set at address 03 and the interface is set at select code 7 Table 3 10 Meta Messages and Controller Commands MESSAGE HP 9825 HP 85 red 703 A ENTER 703 A im o J ow oam LOCKOUT CA
256. ts received through INPUT A The count is accumulated from input cycle to input cycle The Totalize mode is manually gated from the front panel and is independent of the gate time setting RESET clears the count and sets the display back to zero Pressing any key in the input group will reset the count to zero 3 158 TOT STOP A Key 3 159 The TOT STOP A key Stops and holds the count when the counter is operating in the Totalize mode Counting continues without resetting the previous total when the TOT START A key is pressed again RESET clears the counter and resets the display to zero Pressing any key in the input group will reset the count to zero 3 160 DVM Key Option 020 for HP 5334A only 3 161 The DVM key selects the Voltage mode of operation which provides dc voitage measurements of signals received through the Option 020 DVM input module The DVM is fully floating and autoranging Gate time is internally set at 100 ms when the Voltage mode is enabled GATE TIME entry AUTO TRIG and EXT ARM SELECT are automatically disabled EN qmm ap enm leid aai ibaj i lil HP 5334A B Operation and Programming 3 162 INPUT Group INPUT TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER SENS READ LEVELS LEVEL Jy N SENS pd SENE K Y MAX i k 2 MAX SLOPE SLOPE 1LOOKHz START ARM FILTER A STOP ARM X10 ATTN X10 ATTN EXT AC 50Q 2 AC Son Z AUTO TRIG Figure 3 30 INPUT Group 3 163 The INPUT group key
257. umptions should be confirmed before servicing the Counter 4 50 The select code of the controller s 1 0 is assumed to be 7 The address of the controller is assumed to be 21 This select code address combination i e 721 is necessary for these checksto be valid The program lines presented here would have to be modified for any other combination The HP 5334A B is shipped from factory with address set to 03 4 51 If all of these checks are performed successfully the Counter s HP IB capability can be considered to be performing properly These procedures do not check whether or not all of the Counter s program commands are being properly interpreted and and executed by the instrument however it the front panel operation is confirmedto be working properly and its HP IB capability operates correctly then there is a high probability that the Counter will respond properly to all of its program commands HP 85 DESKTOP HP 00085 15003 VO ROM 2 NINS Wea V HP 82936A UNIVERSAL Ss BA oS COUNTER 16K MEMORY MODULE HP 82937A INTERFACE CARD CABLE Figure 4 17 HP IB Verification Test Setup HP 5334A B Performance Tests Equipment Controller uuo ised sexe ERE REG san HP 85A or 85B ROM Drawer asa cove d d x Ea E he a HP 82936A HCE RON oaea Orson che ota o Soie HP 00085 15003 16K Memory Module 85A only e000 ee HP 82903A HP 1B Interface Card Cable cece HP 82937A Procedure T
258. urement ready in afew seconds the controller will alert the user to check the signal if a measurementis ready itis read and displayed and the process is then repeated In this example the HP 85 checks the HP IB controller interface for the status of the SRQ line without disturbing the counter during measurements ws LINE 10 Dimension X to 19 characters DP LINE 20 Send IN GA1 FN4 SM1 WAT com mands to the 5334A B Command IN initializes counter GAT sets gate time to 1 second FN4 places counter in Period A mode SM sets SRQ mask to assert SRQ when data is ready WAT sets counter in Wait To Be Addressed S mode LINE 30 Sets up loop for timeout if counter has 2 no data ready LINE 40 Check controller interface Status Regis ter and read byte into A LINE 50 If data is ready to transmit go to line 90 LINE 60 If counter has no data ready wait 50 ms then go back to LINE 30 and check status byte again LINE 70 Display TIMEOUT CHECK SIGNAL if no data is ready when timeout has elapsed LINE 80 Alert the user that there is no data and stop program execution LINE 90 Read 5334A B measurement into X LINE 100 Send contents of X to HP 85 screen LINE 110 Return to LINE 30 and repeat the process LINE 120 End program execution Running the program produces a display similar to the following removing the signal from the input after several me
259. ve paragraph refer to Section VII of the appropriate Service Manual for backdating amp UA X xs Copyright HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 1987 x 5301 STEVENS CREEK BOULEVARD SANTA CLARA CA 95051 7299 4 MANUAL PART NUMBER 05334 90028 Microfiche Part Number 05334 90029 Printed MAY 1987 Lal aao MANUAL UPDATING CHANGES CHANGE DATE June 26 1989 es Le e e a a a a d P i a ii P a n rimam mmm s o0 M MANUAL IDENTIFICATION w w x MANUAL UPDATING COVERAGE Instrument HP 5334A B we UNIVERSAL COUNTER This supplement adapts your manual OPERATING amp PROGRAMMING to Serial Numbers prefixed through MANUAL 2820A for 5334A a a i ok 2839A for 5334B Manual Part No 05334 90028 KK Ye ko ck ck Ak ox CA KK deo KK Ke ko A oX Manual Microfiche 05334 90029 mE Manual Print Date MAY 1987 owe 4e oko oko ox ok ooo o a Cook ko o X ABOUT THIS SUPPLEMENT The information in this supplement is provided to correct manual errors and to adapt the manual to instruments containing changes after the manual print date Change and correction information in this supplement is itemized by page numbers corresponding to the original manual pages The pages in this supple ment are organized in numerical order by manual page number HOW TO USE THIS SUPPLEMENT Insert this title page in front of the title page in your manual Perform all changes specified for All Serials
260. vice Manuai as a first step in correcting the problem 4 38 PULSE WIDTH A TEST Specification Refer to Table 1 1 HP Model 5334A B Specifications for Pulse Width A specifications Description A pulse width is generated and then measured with the HP 5334A B to Yen the Counter s performance 5334A B 8660A C UNIVERSAL on eee THADUG SIGNAL GENERATOR COUNTER f 50Q FEED OUG Figure 4 9 Pulse Width A Test Setup HP 5334A B Performance Tests Equipment Signal Generator PCs Gg IRE HP 8660A C Procedure 1 Set the signal generator as follows dicil MM EE 100 MHz Amplitude coase s prd PRENEREDDN IE OE as 200 mV rms 2 Set the HP 5334A B as follows Reinitialize the 5334A B FUNCTION pies ca foa Go Rr RAI a s Guns PULSE WIDTH NOTE OPTION 060 If the HP 5334A B has Option 060 rear panel inputs terminate the unused Channel A input front or rear with a 50 Ohm load 3 Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A B Input A using a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4 9 NOTE Do not use a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector at the Input for Counters with Option 060 VERIFY The Counter displays 5 ns 4 ns 4 Record the pulse width measurement on the Performance Test Record Card line 34 Failure If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification consider performing the adjustments in Section V of the Service manual as a first step in correcting the problem
261. vice identification When the ID command is sent the counter will identify itself to the controller the next time ds counter is addressed to talk The string HP 5334A B will be sent followed by a carriage return and a line feed The counter will wait until the device ID is read by the controller then resume taking measurements 3 324 iN Initialize The IN command causes the instrument to exit its current state and go to the power on initialized state If the instrument is in error state error conditions 1 0 thru 4 4 will be cleared by the IN command however errors 5 0X through 5 2 and failures will not be cleared 5 VEL EA ined HP 5334A 8 Operation and Programming 3 325 The initialized states are set as follows All gate math memory and input signal conditioning will be OFF the function will be FREQ A FN1 with AUTO TRIG AUT and autoattenuation ON gate time will be set at 300 milliseconds math offset value will be set at 0 normalize value at 1 the input A AT and input B BT trigger levels will be set at 0 volts and the internal trigger sensitivity levels will be OFF daCS OFF 3 326 RE Reset The reset command clears the current measurement and restarts a new measurement However unlike the RESET LOCAL key the RE command does NOT clear errors 5 0X through 5 2 nor any failures 3 327 SMn Service Request Mask Upon receipt of the Service Request Mask Command SMin the instrument will lo
262. w reentry Press 4 5 6 CHS EEX 5 Press GATE TIME DISPLAY Error 2 2 CAUSE Gate time cannot be set at increments less than 1 ms 4 56 ms 456E 5 exceeds maximum resolution RESULT Digits that exceed the maximum resolution 56 will be truncated to display 400 5 and allow reentry Small zeroes represent non significant digits Press 9 91 191 191 191 19 9 191 91 191 DISPLAY Error 2 3 CAUSE Display buffer cannot accept more than nine digits Press GATE TIME DISPLAY Error 2 1 See step b 2 RESULT Gate time will default to previous setting and allow reentry Press 9 1 1 19 I DISPLAY Error 2 4 RESULT counter will redisplay 9 9 s and allow reentry Press FREQ A and FREQ B simultaneously DISPLAY Error 3 0 CAUSE May result if more than one key is pressed atatime or if a key sticks and another is pressed Press RESET LOCAL key to exit GATE TIME ENTRY mode c The following example applies to HP 5334A only may result if a valid 5334A front panel setup is not stored in the selected register or if the recall operation cannot be completed due to a hardware failure 1 2 Press RECALL memory key Press any digit i e 8 DISPLAY Error 5 18 CAUSE Recall operation cannot be completed i e no front panel setup stored at selected register vx d wesi o P d T ier up gt HP 5334A B a Operation a
263. wer up cycle and generally indicate a hardware related problem Error messages generally indicate that the user has attempted a disallowed operation Refer to paragraphs 3 88 Initial Power up Checks and Seif Diagnostics and 3 252 Error Indications for further details on error and failure messages 3 354 When the HP 5334A B is operating in remote all errors and failures produce a static error condition Normal operation is suspended until the error is cleared In an error state the instrument ignores all HP IB commands except IN TE and ID Errors 1 0 through 4 4 are cleared by a Device Clear Selected Device Clear the IN command and the RESET LOCAL key HP 5334A B Operation and Programming Pressing the RESET LOCAL key will also return the counter to local operation Errors 5 0X through 5 2 and Failures are cleared only by the RESET LOCAL key Error messages are listed in Table 3 3 and Fail messages are listed in Table 3 4 3 355 Error and Failure numbers can be read via the bus by sending the TE command When the TE command is received the instrument will send the error or failure message to the d controller but the instrument will remain in the error or failure number to the HP 85 display E OUTPUT 703 TE ENTER 703 X L DISP X 3 356 The Status Byte refer paragraph 3 295 contains an error bit and a failure bit to flag an re error condition When an error condition occurs the flag that is sent
264. y is variable Refer to Figure 3 31 3 170 PROGRAMMING 5334A TRIGGER SENS LEVELS VIA THE FRONT PANEL Before the desired trigger levels can be selected AUTO TRIG must be OFF SENS must be OFF and DACS must be OFF i e the internal control of trigger sensitivity levels is disabled as described in paragraph 3 174 Compatible settings are shown in Table 3 1 Then the trigger levels may be varied over the entire dynamic range of the counter by adjusting the TRIGGER LEVEL SENS controls The triggering range of the input signal is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER Light Optimum trigger point is usually at the midpoint of the range over which the trigger light flashes iRefer to paragraph 3 166 and 3 168 for details on adjusting the sensitivity levels iia ee HP 5334A B X Operation and Programming 1 Table 3 1 HP 5334A Trigger Sensitivity Level Settings COMPATIBLE SETTINGS RESULTS 3 AUTO TRIG DACS SENS TRIGGER LEVELS HYSTERESIS SENSITIVITY OFF OFF OFF Front Panel MIN MAX Controls se 0 volts Front Panel Front Panel Controls Controls Yi Internal MIN MAX Controls 0 voits internal Internal Controls Controis AUTO MIN je i DISALLOWED SETTINGS por 3 171 For selecting specific trigger level voltages it is recommended that the trigger levels be determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key then adjustingthe controlstothe desired voltages The voltages displayed will be within the accuracy resolution
265. z 50 199999997 200000003 0 5 dBm 1000 MHz 51 999999980 1000000020 E 0 5 dBm 1300 MHz 52 1299999980 1300000020 E 4 45 CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE d AND SENSITIVITY TEST 5334B E 13 5 dBm 90 MHz 53 89999998 90000002 3 13 5 dBm 200 MHz 54 199999997 200000003 E 0 5 dBm 1000 MHz 55 999999980 1000000020 x 0 5 dBm 1300 MHz 56 1299999980 1300000020 4 41 HP 5334A B Performance Tests This page intentionally left blank 4 42 HP 5334A B Performance Tests 4 46 HP IB VERIFICATION TEST 4 47 The following test checks the Counter s ability to process or send the HP IB Messages Meta Messages described in Table 3 9 During the test all of the Counter s HP IB data E input output bus control and handshake lines are checked Only the Counter an HP 85A or 85B controller an HP 1B interface with appropriate cabling and an HP IB Verification Cassette HP P N 59300 10002 Revision G or later are needed for the test setup O aryecsuemos CMATIMEMONMIIOO SSSR ART RRR RRR N 4 48 The validity of these checks is based on the following assumptions The Counter operates correctly from the front panel This can be verified by performing the Operational Verification Tests beginning with paragraph 4 12 The controller properly executes HP IB operations e The HP IB interface properly transfers the controller s instructions 4 49 if the Counter appears to fail any of the HP IB checks the validity of the above ass
266. z HP 3325A A P T Output Level 0 100 mV rms Resolution 0 01 Hz Oscilloscope Bandwidth 200 MHz HP 1715A or A T External Trigger Equivalent _ Signal Generator Frequency Range 990 MHz HP 8656B A Output Level 0 40 mV rms Signal Generator Frequency Range 1300 MHz HP 8660A C AP Output Level 0 500 mV rms Resolution 1 Hz Signature Analyzer HP 5006A T Power Meter Frequency Range 990 MHz HP 436A HP 8481A Power Sensor 10 dB Attenuator HP 8491A A P Option 010 Connectors BNCim to Nim HP 1250 0082 AP NIf to BNC f HP 1250 1474 A P Nim to BNC f HP 1250 0780 A P Controllers HP 85A or 85B ET ROM Drawer HP 82936A P T Input Output ROM HP 00085 15003 POT 16K Memory Module 85A Only l HP 82903A P F HP 1B Interface HP 82937A Requires either HP 86602B or HP 86603A Plug in and the Frequency Extension Module HP 116618 1A Adjustments P Performance Tests T Troubleshooting 1 9 HP 5334A B General Information This page intentionally left blank iod HP 5334A B Installation SECTION H INSTALLATION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 2 This section contains information for unpacking initial inspection preparation for use installation storage and shipment for the HP 5334A B Universal Counter 2 3 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION 2 4 Inspect the shipping containers for damage If the shipping containers or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the

HP 5334B User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents